Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
Rosemount® 8700M
Magnetic Flowmeter Platform
with HART® Protocol
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Rosemount® 8700M
Magnetic Flowmeter Platform
Read this manual before working with the product. For personal and system safety, and for
optimum product performance, make sure you thoroughly understand the contents before
installing, using, or maintaining this product.
Failure to follow these installation guidelines could result in death or serious injury.
Installation and servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. Do not
perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions, unless
qualified.
Verify the installation is done safely and is consistent with the operating environment.
If installed in explosive atmospheres [hazardous areas, classified areas, or an “Ex”
environment], it must be assured that the device certification and installation
techniques are suitable for that particular environment.
Explosion hazard. Do not disconnect equipment when a flammable or combustible
atmosphere is present.
To prevent ignition of flammable or combustible atmospheres, disconnect power
before servicing circuits.
Do not connect a Rosemount 8732EM Transmitter to a non-Rosemount sensor that is
located in an explosive atmosphere.
Substitution of components may impair Intrinsic Safety.
Follow national, local, and plant standards to properly earth ground the transmitter and
sensor. The earth ground must be separate from the process reference ground.
Rosemount Magnetic Flowmeters ordered with non-standard paint options or
non-metallic labels may be subject to electrostatic discharge. To avoid electrostatic
charge build-up, do not rub the flowmeter with a dry cloth or clean with solvents.
The electronics may store energy after power is removed. Allow ten minutes for charge to
dissipate prior to removing electronics compartment cover.
Explosions could result in death or serious injury.
Verify the operating atmosphere of the sensor and transmitter is consistent with the
appropriate hazardous locations certifications.
Do not remove the transmitter cover in explosive atmospheres when the circuit is live.
Before connecting a HART-based communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make
sure the instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or
non-incendive field wiring practices.
Both transmitter covers must be fully engaged to meet explosion-proof requirements.
iii
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Failure to follow safe installation and servicing guidelines could result in death or serious
injury.
Installation should be performed by qualified personnel only.
Do not perform any service other than those contained in this manual.
Process leaks may result in death or serious injury.
The electrode compartment may contain line pressure; it must be depressurized before
the cover is removed.
High voltage that may be present on leads could cause electrical shock.
Avoid contact with leads and terminals.
Failure to follow these maintenance guidelines could result in death or serious injury.
Installation and servicing instructions should be performed by qualified personnel only.
Do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions.
Verify that the operating environment of the sensor and transmitter is consistent with
the appropriate hazardous area approval.
Do not connect a Rosemount 8732EM to a non-Rosemount sensor that is located in an
explosive atmosphere.
Mishandling products exposed to a hazardous substance may result in death or serious
injury.
If the product being returned was exposed to a hazardous substance as defined by
OSHA, a copy of the required Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each hazardous
substance identified must be included with the returned goods.
Failure to follow these troubleshooting guidelines could result in death or serious injury.
Installation and servicing instructions should be performed by qualified personnel only.
Do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions.
Verify that the operating environment of the sensor and transmitter is consistent with
the appropriate hazardous area approval.
Do not connect a Rosemount 8732EM to a non-Rosemount sensor that is located in an
explosive atmosphere.
Mishandling products exposed to a hazardous substance may result in death or serious
injury.
If the product being returned was exposed to a hazardous substance as defined by
OSHA, a copy of the required Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each hazardous
substance identified must be included with the returned goods.
The Rosemount 8732EM Transmitter has not been evaluated for use with other
manufacturers' magnetic flowmeter sensors in hazardous (Ex or Classified) areas.
Special care should be taken by the end-user and installer to ensure the 8732EM
transmitter meets the safety and performance requirements of the other
manufacturer’s equipment.
iv
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Do not connect mains or line power to the magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter coil
excitation circuit.
The products described in this document are NOT designed for nuclear-qualified applications.
Using non-nuclear qualified products in applications that require nuclear-qualified hardware or
products may cause inaccurate readings.
For information on Rosemount nuclear-qualified products, contact your local Emerson Process
Management Sales Representative.
v
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
vi
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Table of Contents
August 2015
Contents
1.1 System description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Product recycling/disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.3 Transmitter symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.4 Pre-installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5 Installation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5.1 Transmitter installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5.2 Identify options and configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5.3 Mechanical considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.5.4 Electrical considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.5.5 Environmental considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.6 Handling and lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.7 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
2.7.1 Upstream/downstream piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
2.7.2 Flow direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
2.8 Sensor location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
2.8.1 Electrode orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
2.9 Sensor installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
2.9.1 Flanged sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
2.9.2 Flange bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
2.10 Wafer sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
2.10.1 Gaskets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
2.10.2 Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
2.10.3 Flange bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
2.11 Process reference connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
2.12 Wiring the transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
2.12.1 Conduit entries and connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
2.12.2 Conduit requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
2.12.3 Connecting sensor to transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
vii
Table of Contents
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Table of Contents
August 2015
2.12.4 8732EM terminal block connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
2.12.5 Analog output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
2.12.6 Powering the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
2.13 Cover jam screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
2.14 Basic configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
2.14.1 Basic setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
3.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
3.2 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
3.3 Hardware switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
3.3.1 Alarm mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
3.3.2 Transmitter security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
3.3.3 Internal/external analog power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
3.3.4 Internal/external pulse power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
3.3.5 Changing hardware switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
3.4 Additional loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
3.4.1 Connect pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
3.4.2 Connect discrete output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
3.4.3 Connect discrete input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
3.5 Process reference connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
3.6 Coil housing configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
3.6.1 Standard coil housing configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
3.6.2 Process leak protection (option M1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
3.6.3 Process leak containment (Option M2 or M4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
3.6.4 Higher temperature applications and sensor insulation best practices .54
4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
4.2 Local operator interface (LOI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
4.2.1 Basic features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
4.2.2 Data entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
viii
Table of Contents
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Table of Contents
August 2015
4.2.3 Data entry examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
4.2.4 Totalizer functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
4.2.5 Display lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
4.2.6 Diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
4.2.7 Display symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
4.3 Field Communicator interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
4.3.1 Field Communicator user interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
4.4 Process variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
4.4.1 PV - Primary variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
4.4.2 PV - Percent of range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
4.4.3 PV - Analog output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
4.4.4 Pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
5.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
5.2 Configure outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
5.2.1 Analog output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
5.2.2 Pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
5.2.3 Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
5.2.4 Discrete input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
5.3 Configure HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.3.1 Variable mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5.3.2 Poll address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.3.3 Burst mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
5.3.4 Configure LOI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.4 Additional parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5.4.1 Coil drive frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5.4.2 Process density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5.4.3 Reverse flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5.4.4 Low flow cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.4.5 PV damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.4.6 Signal processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.5 Configure special units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.5.1 Base volume unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.5.2 Conversion factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
ix
Table of Contents
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Table of Contents
August 2015
5.5.3 Base time unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
5.5.4 Special volume unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
5.5.5 Special flow rate unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
6.2 Licensing and enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
6.2.1 Licensing the 8732EM diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
6.3 Tunable empty pipe detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
6.3.1 Tunable empty pipe parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
6.3.2 Optimizing tunable empty pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
6.4 Electronics temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
6.4.2 Electronics temperature parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
6.5 Ground/wiring fault detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
6.5.1 Turning ground/wiring fault on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
6.5.2 Ground/wiring fault parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
6.6 High process noise detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
6.6.1 Turning high process noise on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
6.6.2 High process noise parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
6.7 Coated electrode detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
6.7.2 Coated electrode parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
6.8 4-20 mA loop verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
6.8.1 Initiating 4-20 mA loop verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
6.8.2 4-20 mA loop verification parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
6.9 SMART™ Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
6.9.3 SMART Meter Verification test criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
6.10 Run manual SMART Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
6.10.1 Test conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
6.10.2 Test scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
6.11 Continuous SMART Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
6.11.1 Test scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
6.12 SMART Meter Verification test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
6.13 SMART Meter Verification measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
6.14 Optimizing the SMART Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
x
Table of Contents
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Table of Contents
August 2015
7.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7.2 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7.3 Process noise profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
7.4 High process noise diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
7.5 Optimizing flow reading in noisy applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
7.5.1 Coil drive frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
7.5.2 Auto zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
7.5.3 Digital signal processing (DSP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
7.6 Explanation of signal processing algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
8.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
8.2 Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
8.3 Installing a Local Operator Interface (LOI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
8.4 Replacing 8732EM revision 4 electronics stack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
8.5 Replacing socket module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
8.5.1 Integral mount socket module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
8.6 Trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
8.6.1 D/A trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
8.6.2 Scaled D/A trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
8.6.3 Digital trim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
8.6.4 Universal trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
8.7 Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
9.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
9.2 Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
9.3 Installation check and guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
9.3.1 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
9.3.2 Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
9.3.3 Remote wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
9.3.4 Process fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
9.4 Diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
9.4.1 Troubleshooting empty pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
xi
Table of Contents
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Table of Contents
August 2015
9.4.2 Troubleshooting ground/wiring fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
9.4.3 Troubleshooting high process noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
9.5 Basic troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
9.6 Sensor troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
9.6.1 Sensor adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
9.6.2 Socket module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
9.6.3 Installed sensor tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
9.6.4 Uninstalled sensor tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
9.7 Technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
9.8 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
A.1 Rosemount 8732EM Transmitter specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
A.1.1 Functional specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
A.1.2 Advanced diagnostics capabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
A.1.3 Output signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
A.1.4 Sensor compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
A.1.5 Performance specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
A.1.6 Analog output effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
A.1.7 Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
A.1.8 F0875 Low Power Software Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
A.2.1 Functional specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
A.2.2 Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
A.3.1 Functional specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
A.3.2 Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
A.4.1 Functional specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
A.4.2 Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
B.1 Product certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
B.2 FM hazardous locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
B.3 ATEX/IECEx hazardous locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
xii
Table of Contents
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Table of Contents
August 2015
B.4 EC Declaration of Conformity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
C.1 8732EM wiring diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
C.3 475 Field Communicator wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
D.1 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
D.2 Universal capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
D.2.1 Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
D.3 Rosemount sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
D.3.2 8701 sensor to 8732 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
D.4 Brooks sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
D.5 Endress and Hauser sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
D.6 Fischer and Porter sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
D.7 Foxboro sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
D.7.4 Foxboro Sensor to 8732 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
D.8 Kent Veriflux VTC sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
D.9 Kent sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
D.9.1 Kent sensor to 8732 Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
D.10 Krohne sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
D.10.1 Krohne sensor to 8732 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
xiii
Table of Contents
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Table of Contents
August 2015
D.11 Taylor sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
D.11.2 Taylor sensor to 8732 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
D.12 Yamatake Honeywell sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
D.13 Yokogawa sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
D.14 Generic manufacturer sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
D.14.1 Generic manufacturer sensor to 8732 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
D.14.2 Identify the terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
D.14.3 Wiring connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
xiv
Table of Contents
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 1: Introduction
August 2015
Section 1
Introduction
1.1
System description
The 8700M Magnetic Flowmeter Platform consists of a sensor and a transmitter. The sensor is
installed in-line with the process piping; the transmitter can be remotely mounted or integrally
mounted to the sensor.
Figure 1-1. Field Mount Transmitters
Integral
Remote
Figure 1-2. Flow Sensors
8705
8711
8721
1. Also available for use with 8707 High Signal sensor with dual calibration (option code D2).
Introduction
1
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 1: Introduction
August 2015
Figure 1-3. 8705 Cross Section
The flow sensor contains two magnetic coils located on opposite sides of the sensor. Two
electrodes, located perpendicular to the coils and opposite each other, make contact with the
liquid. The transmitter energizes the coils and creates a magnetic field. A conductive liquid
moving through the magnetic field generates an induced voltage at the electrodes. This voltage
is proportional to the flow velocity. The transmitter converts the voltage detected by the
electrodes into a flow reading.
1.2
Product recycling/disposal
Recycling of equipment and packaging should be taken into consideration and disposed of in
accordance with local and national legislation/regulations.
2
Introduction
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
Section 2
Installation
Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
Pre-installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5
Installation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5
Handling and lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 10
Sensor location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 11
Sensor installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 12
Wafer sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 17
Wiring the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 23
Basic configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 34
2.1
2.2
Introduction
This section covers the steps required to physically install the magnetic flowmeter. Instructions
and procedures in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the
personnel performing the operations. Refer to the following safety messages before performing
any operation in this section.
Safety messages
Note
This section provides basic installation guidelines for the Rosemount® 8700M Magnetic
Flowmeter Platform with HART® protocol. For comprehensive instructions for detailed
configuration, diagnostics, maintenance, service, installation, or troubleshooting refer to the
appropriate sections in this manual. The quick start guide—as well as this manual—are available
online at www.rosemount.com.
3
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
Failure to follow these installation guidelines could result in death or serious injury.
Installation and servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. Do not
perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions, unless
qualified.
Verify the installation is done safely and is consistent with the operating environment.
If installed in explosive atmospheres [hazardous areas, classified areas, or an “Ex”
environment], it must be assured that the device certification and installation
techniques are suitable for that particular environment.
Explosion hazard. Do not disconnect equipment when a flammable or combustible
atmosphere is present.
To prevent ignition of flammable or combustible atmospheres, disconnect power
before servicing circuits.
Do not connect a Rosemount 8732EM Transmitter to a non-Rosemount sensor that is
located in an explosive atmosphere.
Substitution of components may impair Intrinsic Safety.
Follow national, local, and plant standards to properly earth ground the transmitter
and sensor. The earth ground must be separate from the process reference ground.
Rosemount Magnetic Flowmeters ordered with non-standard paint options or
non-metallic labels may be subject to electrostatic discharge. To avoid electrostatic
charge build-up, do not rub the flowmeter with a dry cloth or clean with solvents.
NOTICE
The sensor liner is vulnerable to handling damage. Never place anything through the
sensor for the purpose of lifting or gaining leverage. Liner damage may render the sensor
inoperable.
Metallic or spiral-wound gaskets should not be used as they will damage the liner face of
the sensor. If spiral wound or metallic gaskets are required for the application, lining
protectors must be used. If frequent removal is anticipated, take precautions to protect
the liner ends. Short spool pieces attached to the sensor ends are often used for
protection.
Correct flange bolt tightening is crucial for proper sensor operation and life. All bolts must
be tightened in the proper sequence to the specified torque specifications. Failure to
observe these instructions could result in severe damage to the sensor lining and possible
sensor replacement.
In cases where high voltage/high current are present near the meter installation, ensure
proper protection methods are followed to prevent stray voltage / current from passing
through the meter. Failure to adequately protect the meter could result in damage to the
transmitter and lead to meter failure.
Completely remove all electrical connections from both sensor and transmitter prior to
welding on the pipe. For maximum protection of the sensor, consider removing it from the
pipeline.
2.3
Transmitter symbols
Caution symbol — check product documentation for details
Protective conductor (grounding) terminal
4
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
2.4
Pre-installation
Before installing the Rosemount 8732EM Magnetic Flowmeter Transmitter, there are several
pre-installation steps that should be completed to make the installation process easier:
Identify the options and configurations that apply to your application
Set the hardware switches if necessary
Consider mechanical, electrical, and environmental requirements
2.5
Installation procedures
2.5.1
Transmitter installation
Installation of the Rosemount Magnetic flowmeter includes both detailed mechanical and
electrical installation procedures.
2.5.2
Identify options and configurations
The typical installation of the 8732EM includes a device power connection, a 4–20mA output
connection, and sensor coil and electrode connections. Other applications may require one or
more of the following configurations or options:
Pulse output
Discrete input/discrete output
HART multidrop configuration
Hardware switches
The 8732EM electronics stack is equipped with user-selectable hardware switches. These
switches set the alarm mode, internal/external analog power, internal/external pulse power, and
transmitter security. The standard configuration for these switches when shipped from the
factory are as follows:
Table 2-1. Standard Switch Configuration
Alarm Mode
High
Internal/External Analog Power(1)
Internal/External Pulse Power(1)
Transmitter Security
Internal
External
Off
1. For electronics with intrinsically safe analog and pulse outputs, the power
must be provided externally. In this configuration, these two hardware
switches are not provided.
In most cases, it will not be necessary to change the setting of the hardware switches. If the
switch settings need to be changed, follow the steps outlined in “Changing hardware switch
Note
To prevent switch damage, use a non-metallic tool to move switch positions.
5
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
Identify any additional options and configurations that apply to the installation. Keep a list of
these options for consideration during the installation and configuration procedures.
2.5.3
Mechanical considerations
The mounting site for the 8732EM Transmitter should provide enough room for secure
mounting, easy access to conduit entries, full opening of the transmitter covers, and easy
readability of the Local Operator Interface (LOI) screen (if equipped).
For remote mount transmitter (8732EMRxxx) installations, a mounting bracket is provided for
Note
If the 8732EM is mounted separately from the sensor, it may not be subject to limitations that
might apply to the sensor.
Rotate integral mount transmitter housing
The transmitter housing can be rotated on the sensor in 90-degree increments by removing the
four mounting screws on the bottom of the housing. Do not rotate the housing more than
180 degrees in any one direction. Prior to tightening, be sure the mating surfaces are clean, the
O-ring is seated in the groove, and there is no gap between the housing and the sensor.
6
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
Figure 2-1. Rosemount 8732EM Dimensional Drawing
ꢀꢁꢂꢃ
>ꢂꢄꢅꢀ@
Note
Default conduit entries for FM approvals are 1/2-in. NPT. If M20 thread connections are required,
thread adapters will be supplied.
2.5.4
Electrical considerations
Before making any electrical connections to the 8732EM, consider national, local and plant
electrical installation requirements. Be sure to have the proper power supply, conduit, and other
accessories necessary to comply with these standards.
Both remotely and integrally mounted 8732EM Transmitters require external power so there
must be access to a suitable power source.
7
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
Table 2-2. Electrical Data
Rosemount 8732EM Flow Transmitter
Power input
90–250VAC, 0.45A, 40VA
12–42VDC, 1.2A, 15W
Pulsed circuit
Internally powered (Active): Outputs up to 12VDC, 12.1mA, 73mW
Externally powered (Passive): Input up to 28VDC, 100mA, 1W
4-20mA output
circuit
Internally Powered (Active): Outputs up to 25mA, 24VDC, 600mW
Externally Powered (Passive): Input up to 25mA, 30VDC, 750mW
Um
250V
Coil excitation
output
500mA, 40V max, 9W max
Rosemount 8705-M and 8711-M/L Sensor(1)
Coil excitation
input
500mA, 40V max, 20W max
Electrode circuit 5V, 200uA, 1mW
1. Provided by the transmitter.
2.5.5
Environmental considerations
To ensure maximum transmitter life, avoid extreme temperatures and excessive vibration.
Typical problem areas include the following:
High-vibration lines with integrally mounted transmitters
Tropical/desert installations in direct sunlight
Outdoor installations in arctic climates
Remote mounted transmitters may be installed in the control room to protect the electronics
from the harsh environment and to provide easy access for configuration or service.
8
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
2.6
Handling and lifting
Handle all parts carefully to prevent damage. Whenever possible, transport the system
to the installation site in the original shipping container.
PTFE-lined sensors are shipped with end covers that protect it from both mechanical
damage and normal unrestrained distortion. Remove the end covers just before
installation.
Keep the shipping plugs in the conduit connections until you are ready to connect and
seal them.
The sensor should be supported by the pipeline. Pipe supports are recommended on
both the inlet and outlet sides of the sensor pipeline. There should be no additional
support attached to the sensor.
Additional safety recommendations for mechanical handling:
-
Use proper PPE (Personal Protection Equipment) including safety glasses and
steel toed shoes).
-
Do not drop the device from any height.
Do not lift the meter by holding the electronics housing or junction box.The sensor liner
is vulnerable to handling damage. Never place anything through the sensor for the
purpose of lifting or gaining leverage. Liner damage can render the sensor useless.
If provided, use the lifting lugs on each flange to handle the Magnetic Flowmeter when
it is transported and lowered into place at the installation site. If lifting lugs are not
provided, the Magnetic Flowmeter must be supported with a lifting sling on each side
of the housing.
-
Standard Pressure 3-in. through 36-in. Flanged Magnetic Flowmeters come with
lifting lugs.
-
-
High Pressure (above 600#) 1-in. through 24-in. Flanged Magnetic Flowmeters
come with lifting lugs.
Wafers and Sanitary Magnetic Flowmeters do not come with lifting lugs.
Figure 2-2. Rosemount 8705 Sensor Support for Handling and Lifting
A
B
A. Without lifting lugs
B. With lifting lugs
9
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
2.7
Mounting
2.7.1
Upstream/downstream piping
To ensure specified accuracy over widely varying process conditions, install the sensor with a
minimum of five straight pipe diameters upstream and two pipe diameters downstream from the
Figure 2-3. Upstream and Downstream Straight Run
2 Pipe Diameters
5 Pipe Diameters
Flow
Installations with reduced upstream and downstream straight runs are possible. In reduced straight
run installations, the meter may not meet absolute accuracy specifications. Reported flow rates will
still be highly repeatable.
2.7.2
Flow direction
Figure 2-4. Flow Direction Arrow
10
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
2.8
Sensor location
The sensor should be installed in a location that ensures it remains full during operation. Vertical
installation with upward process fluid flow keeps the cross-sectional area full, regardless of flow
rate. Horizontal installation should be restricted to low piping sections that are normally full.
Figure 2-5. Sensor Orientation
FLOW
FLOW
2.8.1
Electrode orientation
The electrodes in the sensor are properly oriented when the two measurement electrodes are in
the 3 and 9 o’clock positions or within 45 degrees from the horizontal, as shown on the left in
Figure 2-6. Avoid any mounting orientation that positions the top of the sensor at 90 degrees
Figure 2-6. Mounting Position
CORRECT
INCORRECT
and 08732-2062 for sensor orientation pertaining to specific T-code compliance.
11
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
2.9
Sensor installation
2.9.1
Flanged sensors
Gaskets
The sensor requires a gasket at each process connection. The gasket material must be compatible with
the process fluid and operating conditions. Gaskets are required on each side of a grounding ring
electrode) require only one gasket on each process connection.
Note
Metallic or spiral-wound gaskets should not be used as they will damage the liner face of the
sensor. If spiral wound or metallic gaskets are required for the application, lining protectors
must be used.
Figure 2-7. Flanged Gasket Placement
B
A
FLOW
A. Grounding ring and gasket (optional)
B. Customer-supplied gasket
12
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
2.9.2
Flange bolts
Note
Do not bolt one side at a time. Tighten both sides simultaneously. Example:
1. Snug upstream
2. Snug downstream
3. Tighten upstream
4. Tighten downstream
Do not snug and tighten the upstream side and then snug and tighten the downstream side.
Failure to alternate between the upstream and downstream flanges when tightening bolts may
result in liner damage.
listed. Tighten flange bolts on the upstream side of the sensor in the incremental sequence
downstream side of the sensor. For sensors with greater or fewer flange bolts, tighten the bolts
in a similar crosswise sequence. Repeat this entire tightening sequence at 40%, 60%, 80%, and
100% of the suggested torque values.
If leakage occurs at the suggested torque values, the bolts can be tightened in additional 10%
increments until the joint stops leaking, or until the measured torque value reaches the
maximum torque value of the bolts. Practical consideration for the integrity of the liner often
leads the user to distinct torque values to stop leakage due to the unique combinations of
flanges, bolts, gaskets, and sensor liner material.
Check for leaks at the flanges after tightening the bolts. Failure to use the correct tightening
methods can result in severe damage. While under pressure, sensor materials may deform over
time and require a second tightening 24 hours after the initial installation.
Figure 2-8. Flange Bolt Torquing Sequence
13
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
Prior to installation, identify the lining material of the flow sensor to ensure the suggested
torque values are applied.
Table 2-3. Lining Material
Fluoropolymer liners Other liners
T - PTFE
F - ETFE
A - PFA
P - Polyurethane
N - Neoprene
L - Linatex (Natural Rubber)
D - Adiprene
K - PFA+
Table 2-4. Suggested Flange Bolt Torque Values for Rosemount 8705 (ASME)
Fluoropolymer liners Other liners
Class 150 Class 300
Size
code
Class 150
(pound-feet) (pound-feet) (pound-feet)
Class 300
(pound-feet)
Line size
005
010
015
020
025
030
040
050
060
080
100
120
140
160
180
200
240
0.5-in. (15 mm)
1-in. (25 mm)
8
8
N/A
N/A
7
N/A
N/A
18
8
12
1.5-in. (40 mm)
2-in. (50 mm)
13
25
19
17
14
11
2.5-in. (65 mm)
3-in. (80 mm)
22
24
17
16
34
35
23
23
4-in. (100 mm)
5-in. (125 mm)
6-in. (150 mm)
8-in. (200 mm)
10-in. (250 mm)
12-in. (300 mm)
14-in. (350 mm)
16-in. (400 mm)
18-in. (450 mm)
20-in. (500 mm)
24-in. (600 mm)
26
50
17
32
36
60
25
35
45
50
30
37
60
82
42
55
55
80
40
70
65
125
110
160
170
175
280
415
575
55
105
95
85
70
85
65
140
150
150
250
375
525
120
110
165
195
280
95
90
140
165
245
300(1) 30-in. (750 mm)
360(1) 36-in. (900 mm)
1. Torque values are valid for ASME and AWWA flanges.
14
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
Table 2-5. Flange Bolt Torque and Load Specifications for 8705 (EN 1092-1)
Fluoropolymer liners (in Newton-meters)
Size
code
Line size
PN10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 40
0.5-in. (15 mm)
005
010
015
020
025
030
040
050
060
080
100
120
140
160
180
200
240
N/A
N/A
N/A
10
1-in. (25 mm)
1.5-in. (40 mm)
2-in. (50 mm)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
130
100
120
160
220
190
230
290
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
50
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
130
190
190
320
410
330
440
590
20
50
60
2.5-in. (65 mm)
3-in. (80 mm)
50
50
4-in. (100 mm)
5.0-in. (125 mm)
6-in. (150 mm)
8-in. (200 mm)
10-in. (250 mm)
12-in. (300 mm)
14-in. (350 mm)
16-in. (400 mm)
18-in. (450 mm)
20-in. (500 mm)
24-in. (600 mm)
70
70
100
130
170
250
270
410
610
420
520
850
90
90
130
170
220
280
340
380
570
15
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
Table 2-6. Flange Bolt Torque and Load Specifications for 8705 (EN 1092-1)
Other liners (in Newton-meters)
Size
code
Line size
PN 10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 40
010
015
020
025
030
040
050
060
080
100
120
140
160
180
200
240
1-in. (25 mm)
N/A
N/A
N/A
20
1.5-in. (40 mm)
2-in. (50 mm)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
90
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
40
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
90
30
40
2.5-in. (65 mm)
3-in. (80 mm)
35
30
4-in. (100 mm)
5.0-in. (125 mm)
6-in. (150 mm)
8-in. (200 mm)
10-in. (250 mm)
12-in. (300 mm)
14-in. (350 mm)
16-in. (400 mm)
18-in. (450 mm)
20-in. (500 mm)
24-in. (600 mm)
50
50
70
60
90
60
110
170
180
280
410
280
350
560
70
80
130
130
210
280
220
300
80
110
150
190
230
260
110
150
130
150
200
380
390
16
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
2.10
Wafer sensors
2.10.1
Gaskets
The sensor requires a gasket at each process connection. The gasket material selected must be
compatible with the process fluid and operating conditions. Gaskets are required on each side of
Note
Metallic or spiral-wound gaskets should not be used as they will damage the liner face of the
sensor.
Figure 2-9. Wafer Gasket Placement
17
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
2.10.2
Alignment
On 1.5-in. through 8-in. (40 through 200 mm) line sizes, Rosemount requires installing the
alignment spacers to ensure proper centering of the wafer sensor between the process flanges.
1.
2.
Insert studs for the bottom side of the sensor between the pipe flanges and center the
Place the sensor between the flanges. Make sure the alignment spacers are properly
centered on the studs. For vertical flow installations slide the O-ring over the stud to
3.
4.
Insert the remaining studs, washers, and nuts.
or the liner may be damaged.
Table 2-7. Stud Specifications
Nominal sensor size
Stud specifications
1.5 through 8-in. (40 through 200 mm)
CS, ASTM A193, Grade B7, threaded mounting studs
Table 2-8. Rosemount Alignment Spacer Table
Rosemount alignment spacer table
Line size
Dash no.
(-xxxx)
(in)
(mm)
Flange rating
0A15
0A20
0A30
0B15
AA15
AA20
AA30
AA40
AA60
AA80
AB15
AB20
AB30
AB40
AB60
AB80
DB40
DB60
DB80
DC80
DD15
DD20
DD30
1.5
2
40
50
JIS 10K-20K
JIS 10K-20K
3
80
JIS 10K
1.5
1.5
2
40
JIS 40K
40
ASME- 150#
50
ASME - 150#
3
80
ASME - 150#
4
100
150
200
40
ASME - 150#
6
ASME - 150#
8
ASME - 150#
1.5
2
ASME - 300#
50
ASME - 300#
3
80
ASME - 300#
4
100
150
200
100
150
200
200
40
ASME - 300#
6
ASME - 300#
8
ASME - 300#
4
EN 1092-1 - PN10/16
EN 1092-1 - PN10/16
EN 1092-1 - PN10/16
EN 1092-1 - PN25
EN 1092-1 - PN10/16/25/40
EN 1092-1 - PN10/16/25/40
EN 1092-1 - PN10/16/25/40
6
8
8
1.5
2
50
3
80
18
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
Table 2-8. Rosemount Alignment Spacer Table (continued)
Rosemount alignment spacer table
Line size
Dash no.
(-xxxx)
(in)
(mm)
Flange rating
DD40
DD60
DD80
RA80
RC20
RC30
RC40
RC60
RC80
4
6
8
8
2
3
4
6
8
100
150
200
200
50
EN 1092-1 - PN25/40
EN 1092-1 - PN25/40
EN 1092-1 - PN40
AS40871-PN16
AS40871-PN21/35
AS40871-PN21/35
AS40871-PN21/35
AS40871-PN21/35
AS40871-PN21/35
80
100
150
200
To order an Alignment Spacer Kit (qty 3 spacers) use p/n 08711-3211-xxxx along with the Dash
no. above.
2.10.3
Flange bolts
check for leaks at the flanges after tightening the flange bolts. All sensors require a second
tightening 24 hours after initial flange bolt tightening.
Table 2-9. Rosemount 8711 Torque Specifications
Size code
Line size
Pound-feet
Newton-meter
015
020
030
040
060
080
1.5-in. (40 mm)
2-in. (50 mm)
3-in. (80 mm)
4-in. (100 mm)
6-in. (150 mm)
8-in. (200 mm)
15
25
40
30
50
70
20
34
54
41
68
95
2.11
Process reference connection
ground is also required as part of the installation but is not shown in the figures. Follow national,
local, and plant electrical codes for safety ground.
19
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
Table 2-10. Process Reference Installation Options
Grounding
straps
Reference
electrode
Lining
protectors
Type of pipe
Grounding rings
Conductive
Unlined Pipe
See Figure 2-10
See Figure 2-11
See Figure 2-12
Conductive
Lined Pipe
Insufficient
Grounding
See Figure 2-11
See Figure 2-12
See Figure 2-10
Non-Conductive
Pipe
Insufficient
Grounding
Not Recommended
1. Grounding ring, reference electrode, and lining protectors are not required for process reference. Grounding straps per Figure 2-10
are sufficient.
Note
For line sizes 10-in. and larger, the ground strap may come attached to the sensor body near the
Figure 2-10. Grounding Straps in Conductive Unlined Pipe or Reference Electrode in Lined
Pipe
20
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
2.12
Wiring the transmitter
This wiring section covers the wiring between the transmitter and sensor, the 4-20mA output,
and supplying power to the transmitter. Follow the conduit, cable, and electrical disconnect
requirements in the sections below.
Diagrams.
For hazardous locations, reference Installation Drawings 08732-2060 and 08732-2062 in
For information on connecting to another manufacturer’s sensor, refer to Appendix D
2.12.1
2.12.2
Conduit entries and connections
The standard conduit entries for the transmitter and sensor are 1/2 -in. NPT. Thread adapters are
provided for units ordered with M20 conduit entries. Conduit connections should be made in
accordance with national, local, and plant electrical codes. Unused conduit entries should be
sealed with the appropriate certified plugs. The flow sensor is rated IP68 to a depth of 33 feet
(10 meters) for 48 hours. For sensor installations requiring IP68 protection, the cable grands,
conduit, and conduit plugs must be rated for IP68. The plastic shipping plugs do not provide
ingress protection.
Conduit requirements
For installations with an intrinsically safe electrode circuit, a separate conduit for the
coil cable and the electrode cable may be required. Refer to the Installation Drawings in
For installations with non-intrinsically safe electrode circuit, or when using the
combination cable, a single dedicated conduit run for the coil drive and electrode cable
between the sensor and the remote transmitter may be acceptable. Bundled cables
from other equipment in a single conduit are likely to create interference and noise in
Electrode cables should not be run together and should not be in the same cable tray
with power cables.
Output cables should not be run together with power cables.
Select conduit size appropriate to feed cables through to the flowmeter.
23
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
Figure 2-15. Best Practice Conduit Preparation
A
B
B
C
D
A. Power
B. Output
C. Coil
D. Electrode
2.12.3
Connecting sensor to transmitter
Integral mount transmitters
Integral mount transmitters ordered with a sensor will be shipped assembled and wired at the
cable provided by Emerson™ Process Management.
For replacement transmitters use the existing interconnecting cable from the original assembly.
Replacement cables are available.
Figure 2-16. Interconnecting Cables
Remote mount transmitters
Cables kits are available as individual component cables or as a combination coil/electrode
cable. Remote cables can be ordered direct from Emerson Process Management using the kit
alternative. To order cable, specify length as quantity desired. Equal length of component
cables is required.
Example: 25 feet = Qty (25) 08732-0065-0001
Installation
24
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
Table 2-11. Component Cable Kits
Standard temperature (-20 °C to 75 °C)
Cable kit #
Description
Individual cables
Alpha
p/n
08732-0065-0001
(feet)
Kit, Component Cables, Std Temp
(includes Coil and Electrode)
Coil
Electrode
518243
518245
08732-0065-0002
(meters)
Kit, Component Cables, Std Temp
(includes Coil and Electrode)
Coil
Electrode
518243
518245
08732-0065-0003
(feet)
Kit, Component Cables, Std Temp
(includes Coil and I.S.Electrode)
Coil
518243
518244
Intrinsically Safe Blue Electrode
08732-0065-0004
(meters)
Kit, Component Cables, Std Temp
(includes Coil and I.S.Electrode)
Coil
518243
518244
Intrinsically Safe Blue Electrode
Extended temperature (-50 °C to 125 °C)
Cable kit #
Description
Individual cables
Alpha
p/n
08732-0065-1001
(feet)
Kit, Component Cables, Ext Temp.
(includes Coil and Electrode)
Coil
Electrode
840310
518189
08732-0065-1002
(meters)
Kit, Component Cables, Ext Temp.
(includes Coil and Electrode)
Coil
Electrode
840310
518189
08732-0065-1003
(feet)
Kit, Component Cables, Ext Temp.
(includes Coil and I.S.Electrode)
Coil
840310
840309
Intrinsically Safe Blue Electrode
08732-0065-1004
(meters)
Kit, Component Cables, Ext Temp.
(includes Coil and I.S.Electrode)
Coil
840310
840309
Intrinsically Safe Blue Electrode
Table 2-12. Combination Cable kits
Coil/electrode cable (-20 °C to 80 °C)
Cable kit #
Description
08732-0065-2001
(feet)
Kit, Combination Cable,
Standard
08732-0065-2002
(meters)
08732-0065-3001
(feet)
Kit, Combination Cable,
Submersible
(80°C dry/60°C Wet)
(33ft continuous)
08732-0065-3002
(meters)
25
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
Cable requirements
Shielded twisted pairs or triads must be used. For installations using the individual coil drive and
Consult factory for length between 500–1000 feet (152–304 m). Equal length cable is required
for each.
cable lengths should be limited to less than 330 feet (100 m).
Figure 2-17. Individual Component Cables
Figure 2-18. Combination Coil / Electrode Cable
26
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
Cable preparation
When preparing all wire connections, remove only the insulation required to fit the wire
completely under the terminal connection. Prepare the ends of the coil drive and electrode
the coil drive and electrode cables. Any length of unsheathed conductor should be insulated.
Excessive removal of insulation may result in an unwanted electrical short to the transmitter
housing or other wire connections. Excessive unshielded lead length, or failure to connect cable
shields properly, may expose the unit to electrical noise, resulting in an unstable meter reading.
Figure 2-19. Cable Ends
Shock Hazard
Potential shock hazard across remote junction box terminals 1 & 2 (40V).
Explosion Hazard
Electrodes exposed to process. Use only compatible transmitter and approved installation
practices.
For process temperatures greater than 284 °F (140 °C), use a wire rated for 257 °F (125 °C).
27
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
Figure 2-20. Remote Junction Box Views
Sensor
Transmiter
Wire
Terminal
Wire Terminal
RED
BLUE
1
2
RED
BLUE
1
2
BLACK
YELLOW
WHITE
17
18
19
Shield
BLACK
YELLOW
WHITE
3
17
18
19
2.12.4
8732EM terminal block connections
terminal identification. To connect pulse output and/or discrete input/output, reference
Appendix C Wiring Diagrams. For installations with intrinsically safe outputs, reference the
Figure 2-21. Terminal Block Connections
28
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
2.12.5
Analog output
The analog output signal is a 4-20mA current loop. The loop can be powered internally or
externally via a hardware switch located on the front of the electronics stack. The switch is set to
internal power when shipped from the factory. For units with a display, the LOI must be removed
to change switch position.
Intrinsically safe analog output requires a shielded twisted pair cable.
For HART communication a minimum loop resistance of 250 ohms is required. It is
recommended to use individually shielded twisted pair cable. The minimum conductor size is
0.51 mm diameter (#24 AWG) for cable runs less than 5,000 feet (1,500m) and 0.81 mm
diameter (#20 AWG) for longer distances.
Internal power
The 4-20mA analog signal is a 24VDC active output.
Maximum allowable loop resistance is 500 ohms.
Figure 2-22. Analog Wiring—Internal Power
- 4-20mA
+ 4-20mA
Note
Terminal polarity for the analog output is reversed between internally and externally powered.
29
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
External power
The 4-20mA analog signal is passive and must be powered from an external power source.
Power at the transmitter terminals must be 10.8 - 30VDC.
Figure 2-23. Analog Wiring—External Power
+
-
POWER
SUPPLY
Analog loop load limitations
Maximum loop resistance is determined by the voltage level of the external power supply, as
Figure 2-24. Analog Loop Load Limitations
600
0
Operating
Region
10.8
30
Power Supply (Volts)
R
=
31.25 (V – 10.8)
max
ps
V
=
Power Supply Voltage (Volts)
ps
R
=
Maximum Loop Resistance (Ohms)
max
30
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
2.12.6
Powering the transmitter
The 8732EM transmitter is available in two models. The AC powered transmitter is designed to
be powered by 90–250VAC (50/60Hz). The DC powered transmitter is designed to be powered
by 12–42VDC. Before connecting power to the 8732EM, be sure to have the proper power
supply, conduit, and other accessories. Wire the transmitter according to national, local, and
Figure 2-25. DC Power Requirements
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
12
16
20
24
28
32
36
40
Power Supply (DC Volts)
Peak inrush is 42A at 42VDC supply, lasting approximately 1ms.
Inrush for other supply voltages can be estimated with:
Inrush (Amps) = Supply (Volts) / 1.0
Figure 2-26. AC Power Requirements
AC Supply Characteristics
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
90
110
130
150
170
190
210
230
250
Power Supply (VAC)
31
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
Apparent Power (VA)
34
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
90
110
130
150
170
190
210
230
250
Power Supply (VAC)
Peak inrush is 35.7A at 250VAC supply, lasting approximately 1ms.
Inrush for other supply voltages can be estimated with:
Inrush (Amps) = Supply (Volts) / 7.0
Supply wire requirements
Use 10–18 AWG wire rated for the proper temperature of the application. For wire 10–14 AWG
use lugs or other appropriate connectors. For connections in ambient temperatures above
122 °F (50 °C), use a wire rated for 194 °F (90 °C). For DC powered transmitters with extended
cable lengths, verify that there is a minimum of 12VDC at the terminals of the transmitter with
the device under load.
Electrical disconnect requirements
Connect the device through an external disconnect or circuit breaker per national and local
electrical code.
Installation category
The installation category for the 8732EM is OVERVOLTAGE CAT II.
32
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
Overcurrent protection
The 8732EM transmitter requires overcurrent protection of the supply lines. Fuse rating and
Table 2-13. Fuse Requirements
Input
voltage
Fuse rating
Compatible fuse
90–250VAC
rms
1 Amp, 250V, I2t ≥ 1.5 A2s
Bussman AGC-1, Littelfuse 31201.5HXP
Rating, Fast Acting
12–42VDC
3 Amp, 250V, I2t ≥ 14 A2s
Bel Fuse 3AG 3-R, Littelfuse 312003P, Schurter 0034.5135
Rating, Fast Acting
Power terminals
For AC powered transmitter (90–250VAC, 50/60 Hz):
Connect AC Neutral to terminal 9 (AC N/L2) and AC Line to terminal 10 (AC/L1).
For DC powered transmitter:
Connect negative to terminal 9 (DC -) and positive to terminal 10 (DC +).
DC powered units may draw up to 1.2A.
2.13
Cover jam screw
For flow meters shipped with a cover jam screw, the screw should be installed after the
instrument has been wired and powered up. Follow these steps to install the cover jam screw:
1.
2.
3.
Verify the cover jam screw is completely threaded into the housing.
Install the housing cover and verify the cover is tight against the housing.
Using a 2.5 mm hex wrench, loosen the jam screw until it contacts the transmitter
cover.
4.
Turn the jam screw an additional 1/2 turn counterclockwise to secure the cover.
Note
Application of excessive torque may strip the threads.
5. Verify the cover cannot be removed.
33
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
2.14
Basic configuration
Once the magnetic flowmeter is installed and power has been supplied, the transmitter must be
configured through the basic setup. The basic setup parameters can be configured through
either an LOI or a HART communication device.
For instructions on operation of the LOI or HART Communication device, refer to
complete list of device parameters.
Configuration settings are saved in nonvolatile memory within the transmitter.
2.14.1
Basic setup
Tag
Basic Setup, Tag
LOI menu path
1,3,1
2,2,9,1,1
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
Tag is the quickest and shortest way of identifying and distinguishing between transmitters.
Transmitters can be tagged according to the requirements of your application. The tag may be
up to eight characters long.
Flow units (PV)
Basic Setup, Flow Units, PV Units
LOI menu path
1,3,1
2,2,1,2
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
The flow units variable specifies the format in which the flow rate will be displayed. Units should
measure.
Line size
Basic Setup, Line Size
LOI menu path
1,3,1
2,2,1,4,2
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
The line size (sensor size) must be set to match the actual sensor connected to the transmitter.
Upper Range Value (URV)
Basic Setup, PV URV
LOI menu path
1,3,1
2,2,1,3,3
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
The URV sets the 20 mA point for the analog output. This value is typically set to full-scale flow.
The units that appear will be the same as those selected under the flow units parameter. The
URV may be set between –39.3 ft/s to 39.3 ft/s (–12 m/s to 12 m/s). There must be at least 1
ft/s (0.3 m/s) span between the URV and LRV.
34
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
Lower Range Value (LRV)
Basic Setup, PV LRV
LOI menu path
1,3,1
2,2,1,3,2
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
The LRV sets the 4 mA point for the analog output. This value is typically set to zero flow. The
units that appear will be the same as those selected under the flow units parameter. The LRV
may be set between –39.3 ft/s to 39.3 ft/s (–12 m/s to 12 m/s). There must be at least 1 ft/s (0.3
m/s) span between the URV and LRV.
Calibration number
Basic Setup, Cal Number
LOI menu path
1,3,1
2,2,1,4,1
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
The sensor calibration number is a 16-digit number generated at the Rosemount factory during
flow calibration, is unique to each sensor, and is located on the sensor tag.
PV damping
Basic Setup, PV Damping
LOI menu path
1,3,1
2,2,1,3,4
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
Primary variable damping allows selection of a response time, in seconds, to a step change in
flow rate. It is most often used to smooth fluctuations in output.
35
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
Table 2-14. Available Flow Units
Volumetric units
Mass units
gal / sec
gal / min
gal / hr
lbs / sec
lbs / min
lbs / hr
gal / day
L / sec
lbs / day
kg / sec
L / min
kg / min
L / hr
kg / hr
L / day
kg / day
ft3 / sec
ft3 / min
ft3 / hr
(s) tons / min
(s) tons / hr
(s) tons / day
(m) tons / min
(m) tons / hr
(m) tons / day
ft3 / day
cm3 / min
m3 / sec
m3 / min
m3 / hr
Velocity units
m3 / day
ft / sec
m / sec
Impgal / sec
Impgal / min
Impgal / hr
Special units
Impgal / day
Special (User Defined)
B42 / sec (1 barrel = 42 gallons)
B42 / min (1 barrel = 42 gallons)
B42 / hr (1 barrel = 42 gallons)
B42 / day (1 barrel = 42 gallons)
B31 / sec (1 barrel = 31 gallons)
B31 / min (1 barrel = 31 gallons)
B31 / hr (1 barrel = 31 gallons)
B31 / day (1 barrel = 31 gallons)
36
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
Table 2-15. Available Sensor Sizes
Sensor size
0.10-in. (2.5 mm)
0.15-in. (4 mm)
0.25-in. (6 mm)
0.30-in. (8 mm)
0.50-in. (15 mm)
0.75-in. (20 mm)
1.0-in. (25 mm)
1.5-in. (40 mm)
2.0-in. (50 mm)
2.5-in. (65 mm)
3.0-in. (80 mm)
4.0-in. (100 mm)
5.0-in. (125 mm)
6.0-in. (150 mm)
8.0-in. (200 mm)
10-in. (250 mm)
12-in. (300 mm)
14-in. (350 mm)
16-in. (400 mm)
18-in. (450 mm)
20-in. (500 mm)
24-in. (600 mm)
28-in. (700 mm)
30-in. (750 mm)
32-in. (800 mm)
36-in. (900 mm)
40-in. (1000 mm)
42-in. (1050 mm)
44-in. (1100 mm)
48-in. (1200 mm)
54-in. (1350 mm)
56-in. (1400 mm)
60-in. (1500 mm)
64-in. (1600 mm)
66-in. (1650 mm)
72-in. (1800 mm)
78-in. (1950 mm)
80-in. (2000 mm)
37
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 2: Installation
August 2015
38
Installation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
August 2015
Section 3
Advanced Installation Details
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 39
Hardware switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 39
Hardware switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 39
Additional loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 41
Connect discrete input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 49
Process reference connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 50
Coil housing configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 50
3.1
3.2
Introduction
This section details some of the advanced installation considerations when utilizing the
Rosemount® 8700M Magnetic Flowmeter Platform.
Safety messages
The electronics may store energy after power is removed. Allow ten minutes for charge to
dissipate prior to removing electronics compartment cover.
Note
The electronics stack is electrostatically sensitive. Be sure to observe handling precautions for
static-sensitive components.
3.3
Hardware switches
The electronics are equipped with four user-selectable hardware switches. These switches set
the Alarm Mode, Internal/External Analog Power, Transmitter Security, and Internal/External
Pulse Power.
Definitions of these switches and their functions are provided below. To change the settings, see
below.
3.3.1
Alarm mode
If an event occurs that would trigger an alarm in the electronics, the analog output will be driven
high or low, depending on the switch position. The switch is set in the HIGH position when
output values of the alarm.
39
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
August 2015
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
Transmitter security
The security switch on the 8732EM allows the user to lock out any configuration changes
attempted on the transmitter. No changes to the configuration are allowed when the switch is
in the ON position. The flow rate indication and totalizer functions remain active at all times.
With the switch in the ON position, access to review the operating parameters is available. No
configuration changes are allowed.
Transmitter security is set in the OFF position when shipped from the factory.
Internal/external analog power
The 8732EM 4-20 mA loop may be powered internally or by an external power supply. The
internal /external power supply switch determines the source of the 4-20 mA loop power.
Transmitters are shipped from the factory with the switch set in the INTERNAL position.
The external power option is required for multidrop configurations. A 10-30 VDC external
supply is required and the 4-20 mA power switch must be set to the EXTERNAL position. For
Internal/external pulse power
The 8732EM pulse loop may be powered internally or by an external power supply. The inter-
nal/external power supply switch determines the source of the pulse loop power.
Transmitters are shipped from the factory with the switch set in the EXTERNAL position.
A 5-28 VDC external supply is required when the pulse power switch is set to the EXTERNAL
position. For further information on the pulse external power, see “Connect pulse output” on
Changing hardware switch settings
To change the switch settings, complete the steps below:
Note
The hardware switches are located on the top side of the electronics board and changing their
settings requires opening the electronics housing. If possible, carry out these procedures away
from the plant environment in order to protect the electronics.
1.
2.
3.
Place the control loop into manual control.
Disconnect power to the transmitter
Remove the electronics compartment cover. If the cover has a cover jam screw, this
must be loosened prior to removal of the cover.
4.
5.
Remove the LOI, if applicable.
40
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
August 2015
6.
7.
Change the setting of the desired switches with a small, non-metallic tool.
Replace the LOI if applicable, and the electronics compartment cover. If the cover has a
cover jam screw, this must be tightened to comply with installation requirements. See
“Cover jam screw” on page 33 for details on the cover jam screw.
8.
9.
Return power to the transmitter and verify the flow measurement is correct.
Return the control loop to automatic control.
Figure 3-1. Rosemount 8732EM Electronics Stack and Hardware Switches
3.4
Additional loops
There are three additional loop connections available on the 8732EM Transmitter:
Pulse output - used for external or remote totalization.
Channel 1 can be configured as discrete input or discrete output.
Channel 2 can be configured as discrete output only.
3.4.1
Connect pulse output
The pulse output function provides a galvanically isolated frequency signal that is proportional
to the flow through the sensor. The signal is typically used in conjunction with an external
totalizer or control system. The default position of the internal/external pulse power switch is in
the EXTERNAL position. The user-selectable power switch is located on the electronics board.
41
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
August 2015
External
For transmitters with the internal/external pulse power switch (output option code A) set in the
EXTERNAL position or transmitters with intrinsically safe outputs (output option code B) the
following requirements apply:
Supply voltage: 5 to 28 VDC
Maximum current: 100 mA
Maximum power: 1.0 W
Load resistance: 200 to 10k Ohms (typical value 1k Ohms)
Output option
code
Supply voltage
Resistance vs cable length
A
B
B
B
5-28 VDC
5 VDC
12 VDC
24 VDC
Pulse mode: Fixed pulse width or 50% duty cycle
Pulse duration: 0.1 to 650 ms (adjustable)
Maximum pulse frequency: Output option code A is 10,000 Hz
Maximum pulse frequency: Output option code B is 5000 Hz
FET switch closure: solid state switch
42
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
August 2015
Figure 3-2. Output Option Code A—Maximum Frequency vs. Cable Length
Figure 3-3. Output Option Code B—5 VDC Supply
At 5000 Hz operation with a 5 VDC supply, pull-up resistances of 200 to 1000 Ohms allow
cable lengths up to 660 ft (200 m).
43
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
August 2015
Figure 3-4. Output Option Code B—2 VDC Supply
At 5000 Hz operation with a 12 VDC supply, pull-up resistances of 500 to 2500 Ohms allow
cable lengths up to 660 ft (200 m). Resistances from 500 to 1000 Ohms allow a cable
length of 1000 ft (330 m).
Figure 3-5. Output Option Code B—24 VDC Supply
At 5000 Hz operation with a 24 VDC supply, pull-up resistances of 1000 to 10,000 Ohms
allow cable lengths up to 660 ft (200 m). Resistances from 1000 to 2500 Ohms allow a
cable length of 1000 ft (330 m).
44
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
August 2015
Complete the following steps to connect an external power supply.
1.
Ensure the power source and connecting cable meet the requirements outlined
previously.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn off the transmitter and pulse output power sources.
Run the power cable to the transmitter.
Connect - DC to terminal 3.
Connect + DC to terminal 4.
Figure 3-6. Connecting an Electromechanical Totalizer/Counter with External Power
Supply
Schematic showing
FET between
terminal 3 and 4
Electro-mechanical
Counter
5-24 V DC
Power Supply
Note
Total loop impedance must be sufficient to keep loop current below maximum rating. A resistor
can be added in the loop to raise impedance.
45
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
August 2015
Figure 3-7. Connecting to an Electronic Totalizer/Counter with External Power Supply
Schematic showing
FET between
terminal 3 and 4
Electronic
Counter
5-24 V DC
Power Supply
Note
Total loop impedance must be sufficient to keep loop current below maximum rating.
46
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
August 2015
Internal
When the pulse switch is set to internal, the pulse loop will be powered from the transmitter.
transmitter directly to the counter. Internal pulse power can only be used with an electronic
totalizer or counter and cannot be used with an electromechanical counter.
1.
2.
3.
Turn off the transmitter.
Connect - DC to terminal 3.
Connect + DC to terminal 4.
Figure 3-8. Connecting to an Electronic Totalizer / Counter with Internal Power Supply
Schematic showing
FET between
terminal 3 and 4
Electronic
Counter
47
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
August 2015
3.4.2
Connect discrete output
The discrete output control function can be configured to drive an external signal to indicate
zero flow, reverse flow, empty pipe, diagnostic status, flow limit, or transmitter status. The
following requirements apply:
Supply Voltage: 5 to 28 VDC
Maximum Voltage: 28 VDC at 240 mA
Switch Closure: solid state relay
For discrete output control, connect the power source and control relay to the transmitter. To
connect external power for discrete output control, complete the following steps:
1.
Ensure the power source and connecting cable meet the requirements outlined
previously.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn off the transmitter and discrete power sources.
Run the power cable to the transmitter.
Channel 1: Connect -DC to terminal 5, connect +DC to terminal 6.
Channel 2: Connect -DC to terminal 7, connect +DC to terminal 8.
Figure 3-9. Connect Discrete Output to Relay or Control System Input
Control Relay
or Input
5-28 V DC
Power Supply
Note
Total loop impedance must be sufficient to keep loop current below maximum rating. A resistor
can be added in the loop to raise impedance.
48
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
August 2015
3.4.3
Connect discrete input
The discrete input can provide positive zero return (PZR) or net totalizer reset. The following
requirements apply:
Supply Voltage: 5 to 28 VDC
Control Current: 1.5 - 20mA
To connect the discrete input, complete the following steps.
1.
Ensure the power source and connecting cable meet the requirements outlined
previously.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn off the transmitter and discrete power sources.
Run the power cable to the transmitter.
Connect -DC to terminal 5.
Connect +DC to terminal 6.
Figure 3-10. Connecting Discrete Input
Relay Contact or Control
System Output
5-28 V DC
Power Supply
49
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
August 2015
Figure 3-11. Discrete Input Operating Range
30
25
20
15
10
5
Digital Input Operating Range
0
0
2.5
5
7.5
10
12.5
15
Series Resistance Ωin + Ωext (Kohms)
3.5
3.6
Process reference connection
Establishing a process reference for the sensor is one of the most important details of sensor
installation. Proper process reference creates the lowest noise environment for the transmitter
proper installation.
Note
Consult factory for installations requiring cathodic protection or situations where there are high
electrical currents or high electrical potentials present in the process.
Coil housing configuration
The coil housing provides physical protection of the coils and other internal components from
contamination and physical damage that might occur in an industrial environment. The coil
housing is an all-welded and gasket-free design.
The 8705 model is available in four coil housing configurations. Configurations are identified by
the M0, M1, M2, or M4 options codes found in the model number. The 8711 and 8721 models
are only available in one coil housing coil configuration; a separate option code is not available.
50
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
August 2015
3.6.1
Standard coil housing configuration
The standard coil housing configuration is a factory sealed all-welded enclosure and is available
8705 with option code M0 - 8705xxxxxxxxM0
8711 with option code M/L - 8711xxxxxxM/L
8721 with option code R/U - 8721xxxxxxR/U
Figure 3-12. Standard Housing Configuration (8705 Shown)
51
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
August 2015
3.6.2
Process leak protection (option M1)
The 8705 is available with process leak detection through the use of a threaded connection and
pressure relief valve (PRV). This coil housing configuration is a factory sealed all-welded
enclosure. The M1 configuration is available for the 8705 only.
8705 with option code M1 - 8705xxxxxxxxM1
A PRV can be installed in the threaded connection to prevent possible over-pressuring of the coil
housing caused by a primary seal failure. The PRV is capable of venting fugitive emissions when
pressure inside the coil housing exceeds five psi. Additional piping may be connected to the PRV
In the event of a primary seal failure, this configuration will not protect the coils or other internal
components of the sensor from exposure to the process fluid.
Note
The PRV is supplied with the meter to be installed by the customer. Installation of the PRV and
any associated piping must be performed in accordance with environmental and hazardous area
requirements.
Figure 3-13. 8705 with M1 Coil Housing Configuration and PRV
52
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
August 2015
3.6.3
Process leak containment (Option M2 or M4)
The 8705 is available with process leak containment. The coil housing configuration is a factory
sealed all-welded enclosure with the addition of sealed electrode compartments. The M2/M4
configuration is available for the 8705 only.
8705 with option code M2/M4 - 8705xxxxxxxxM2/M4
This configuration divides the coil housing into separate compartments, one for each electrode
and one for the coils. In the event of a primary seal failure, the fluid is contained in the electrode
compartment. The sealed electrode compartment prevents the process fluid from entering the
coil compartment where it may damage the coils and other internal components. The electrode
compartments are designed to contain the process fluid up to a maximum pressure of 740 psig.
Code M2 - sealed, welded coil housing with separate sealed and welded electrode
Code M4 - sealed, welded coil housing with separate sealed and welded electrode
compartments with a threaded port on the electrode tunnel cap, capable of venting
Note
To properly vent process fluid from the electrode compartment to a safe location, additional
piping is required and must be installed by the user. Installation of any associated piping must be
performed in accordance with environmental and hazardous area requirements. In the event of
primary seal failure, the electrode compartment may be pressurized. Use caution when
removing the cap screw.
Figure 3-14. 8705 with M2 Coil Housing Configuration
53
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
August 2015
Figure 3-15. 8705 with M4 Coil Housing Configuration
3.6.4
Higher temperature applications and sensor insulation
best practices
Insulation of the magnetic flowmeter sensor is not typically recommended. However, in
applications with higher temperature process fluids (above 150°F / 65°C), plant safety, sensor
reliability, and sensor longevity can be improved with careful attention to proper insulation.
1.
In applications where process fluid permeation of the liner has been observed or may
be expected, the rate of permeation can be reduced by decreasing the temperature
gradient between the process fluid and the outside of the meter body. In these
applications only the space between the process flanges and the coil housing should
54
Advanced Installation Details
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 3: Advanced Installation Details
August 2015
Figure 3-16. Insulating a Rosemount Magnetic Flowmeter for Permeation
2.
When insulation of the magnetic flowmeter sensor is required due to plant safety
standards designed to protect personnel from contact burns, extend the insulation up
insulation should NOT cover the coil housing or the terminal junction box. Insulating
the coil housing and the terminal junction box can result in overheating of the coil
compartment and terminals, resulting in erratic/erroneous flow readings and potential
damage or failure of the meter.
55
Advanced Installation Details
Section 4: Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
Section 4
Operation
Local operator interface (LOI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 57
Field Communicator interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 64
Process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 85
4.1
4.2
Introduction
The 8732EM transmitter features a full range of software functions, transmitter configurations,
and diagnostic settings. These features can be accessed through the Local Operator Interface
(LOI), a handheld Field Communicator, AMS® Device Manager, or a host control system.
Configuration variables may be changed at any time; specific instructions are provided through
on-screen instructions.
This section covers the basic features of the LOI (optional) and provides general instructions on
how to navigate the configuration menus using the optical buttons. The section also covers the
use of a Field Communicator and provides menu trees to access each function.
Local operator interface (LOI)
The optional LOI provides a communications center for the 8732EM.
The LOI allows an operator to:
Change transmitter configuration
View flow and totalizer values
Start/stop and reset totalizer values
Run diagnostics and view the results
Monitor transmitter status
Other functions
4.2.1
Basic features
The basic features of the LOI include a display window and four navigational arrow keys (see
To activate the LOI, press the DOWN arrow two times. Use the UP, DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT
arrows to navigate the menu structure. A map of the LOI menu structure is shown on Figure 4-2
57
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Figure 4-1. Local Operator Interface Keypad and Character Display
4.2.2
Data entry
The LOI keypad does not have alphanumeric keys. Alphanumeric and symbolic data is entered
by the following procedure. Use the steps below to access the appropriate functions.
1.
to access the appropriate alphanumeric parameter.
2.
Use the UP, DOWN or RIGHT arrow key to begin editing the parameter. (Use the LEFT
arrow key to go back without changing the value).
For numerical data, toggle through the digits 0-9, decimal point, and dash. For
alphabetical data, toggle through the letters of the alphabet A-Z, digits 0-9, and the
symbols ?, &, +, -, *, /, $, @,%, and the blank space.
3.
4.
Use the RIGHT arrow key to highlight each character you want to change and then use
the UP or DOWN arrow keys to select the value. If you go past a character that you wish
to change, keep using the RIGHT arrow key to wrap around in order to arrive at the
character you want to change.
Press “E” (the LEFT arrow key) when all changes are complete to save the entered
values. Press the LEFT arrow key again to navigate back to the menu tree.
58
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
4.2.3
Data entry examples
Figure 4-3. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the desired parameters to review/change.
Parameter values are classified as table values or select values. Table values are available from a
predefined list. For parameters such as line size or flow units. Select values are integers. floating
point numbers, or character strings and are entered one character at a time using the arrow
keys for parameters such as PV URV and calibration number.
Table value example
Setting the sensor size:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Using the arrow keys, select line size from the basic setup menu.
Press the UP/DOWN arrow to increase/decrease the sensor size to the next value.
When you reach the desired sensor size, press “E” (the left arrow).
Set the loop to manual if necessary, and press “E” again.
After a moment, the LOI will display VALUE STORED SUCCESSFULLY and then display the
selected value.
Select value example
Changing the upper range limit:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Using the arrow keys, select PV URV from the basic setup menu.
Press RIGHT arrow key to position the cursor.
Press UP or DOWN to set the number.
Repeat steps 3and 4 until desired number is displayed, press “E” (the left arrow).
Set the loop to manual if necessary, and press “E” again.
After a moment, the LOI will display VALUE STORED SUCCESSFULLY and then display the
selected value.
4.2.4
Totalizer functionality
Start totalizer
To start the totalizer, press the DOWN arrow to display the totalizer screen and press “E” to
begin totalization. A symbol will flash in the lower right hand corner indicating that the meter is
totalizing.
59
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Pause totalizer
To pause the totalizer, press the DOWN arrow to display the totalizer screen and press the
RIGHT arrow to pause the totalizer. This will hold the current totalizer values on the screen for
reading or recording. The totalizer will continue to run even though the values are not changing.
To unpause the totalizer, press the RIGHT arrow again. The totalizer value will instantly
increment to the correct value and continuing running.
Stop totalizer
To stop the totalizer, press the DOWN arrow to display the totalizer screen and press “E” to end
totalization. The flashing symbol will no longer display in the lower right hand corner indicating
that the meter has stopped totalizing.
Reset totalizer
To reset the totalizer, press the DOWN arrow to display the totalizer screen and follow the
procedure above to stop totalization. Once totalization has stopped, press the RIGHT arrow key
to reset the NET total value to zero. To reset the GROSS, FORWARD, and REVERSE total values,
change the line size.
4.2.5
Display lock
The 8732EM transmitter has display lock functionality to prevent unintentional configuration
changes. The display can be locked manually or configured to automatically lock after a set
period of time.
Manual display lock
To activate hold the UP arrow for 3 seconds and then following the on-screen instructions.
When the display lock is activated, a lock symbol will appear in the lower right hand corner of
the display. To deactivate the display lock, hold the UP arrow for 3 seconds and follow the
on-screen instructions. Once deactivated, the lock symbol will no longer appear in the lower
right hand corner of the display.
Auto display lock
1.
2.
3.
Using the arrow keys, select LOI config from the Detailed Setup menu.
Press DOWN arrow to highlight disp auto lock and press the RIGHT arrow to enter the
menu.
4.
5.
6.
Press DOWN arrow to select the auto lock time.
When you reach the desired time, press “E” (the left arrow).
Set the loop to manual if necessary, and press “E” again.
After a moment, the LOI will display VALUE STORED SUCCESSFULLY and then display the
selected value.
60
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
4.2.6
4.2.7
Diagnostic messages
actions for these messages.
Display symbols
When certain transmitter functions are active, a symbol will appear in the lower-right corner of
the display. The possible symbols include the following:
Display Lock
Totalizer
Reverse flow
Continuous meter verification
61
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Figure 4-2. Local Operator Interface (LOI) Menu Tree (Diagnostics and Basic Setup)
Diagnostics
Basic Setup
Detailed Setup
Diag Controls
Basic Diag
Advanced Diag
Variables
Trims
Empty Pipe
Coils
Process Noise
Ground/Wiring
Elec Coating
Elect Temp
Electrodes
Transmitter
Analog Output
Status
Reverse Flow
Cont Meter Ver
EP Control
EP Value
EP Trig Level
EP Counts
Self Test
Control 1
AO Loop Test
Pulse Out Test
Empty Pipe
Elect Temp
Flow Limit 1
Flow Limit 2
Total Limit
Mode 1
Test Condition
Test Criteria
MV Results
High Limit 1
Low Limit 1
Hysteresis
Sim Velocity
ActualVelocity
Flow Sim Dev
Xmtr Cal Verify
Sensor Cal Dev
Sensor Cal
Control 2
Mode 2
High Limit 2
Low Limit 2
Hysteresis
Coil Circuit
Electrode Ckt
Manual Results
Continual Res
Total Control
Total Mode
Tot Hi Limit
Tot Low Limit
Hysteresis
Test Criteria
Sim Velocity
ActualVelocity
Flow Sim Dev
Coil Inductnce
Sensor Cal Dev
Coil Resist
Electrode Res
4-20 mA Expect
4-20 mA Actual
1AO FB Dev
Valves
Reset Baseline
Recall Values
Ground/Wiring
Process Noise
Elec Coating
Meter Verify
4-20 mA Verify
Licensing
EC Current Val
EC Limit 1
EC Limit 2
No Flow
EC Max Value
Reset Max Val
Flowing, Full
Empty Pipe
Continual
Run Meter Ver
View Results
Sensr Baseline
Test Criteria
Coil Resist
Manual Measure
Continual Meas
Coil Inductnce
Electrode Res
Measurements
Process Noise
Ground/Wiring
Elec Coating
Meter Verif
DI/DO
Coil Resist
4-20mA Verify
View Results
Coil Inductnce
Actual Velocity
Electrode Res
Device ID
License Status
License Key
Coil Resist
Software Rev
License Key
Coil Signature
Electrode Res
ActualVelocity
Flow Sim Dev
4-20 mA Expect
4-20 mA Actual
AO FB Dev
Empty Pipe
Elect Temp
Line Noise
5Hz SNR
37Hz SNR
Elec Coating
Signal Power
37Hz Auto Zero
Coil Current
MV Results
Test Condition
Test Criteria
MV Results
Sim Velocity
ActualVelocity
Flow Sim Dev
Xmtr Cal Verify
Sensor Cal Dev
Sensor Cal
EC Current Val
EC Max Value
Coil Circuit
Electrode Ckt
Manual Results
Continual Results
D/A Trim
Digital Trim
Test Criteria
37Hz Auto Zero
Universal Trim
Sim Velocity
ActualVelocity
Flow Sim Dev
Coil Inductnce
Sensor Cal Dev
Coil Resist
Electrode Res
4-20 mA Expect
4-20 mA Actual
AO FB Dev
Tag
Flow Units
Line Size
PV URV
PV Units
Special Units
Totalize Units
PV LRV
Cal Number
PV Damping
Detailed Setup
see Figure 4-3 on next page
62
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Figure 4-3. Local Operator Interface (LOI) Menu Tree (Detailed Setup)
Diagnostics
Basic Setup
Detailed Setup
More Params
Output Config
LOI Config
Sig Processing
Device Info
Coil Frequency
Proc Density
PV USL
PV URV
PV LSL
Empty Pipe
PV LRV
PV Min Span
Process Noise
Ground/Wiring
Elec Coating
Elect Temp
PV AO
Alarm Type
Test
Alarm Level
AO Diag Alarm
Reverse Flow
Flow Limit 1
Flow Limit 2
Total Limit
Analog
Pulse
Cont Meter Ver
Pulse Scaling
Pulse Width
Pulse Mode
Test
DI/DO Config
Totalizer
Reverse Flow
Alarm level
HART
Input
Output
N/A
DI/O 1 Control
DI 1
DO 1
DI/O 1
DO 2
Reverse Flow
Zero Flow
Flow Limit 1
Flow Limit 2
Total Limit
Diag Alert
XMTR Fault
Empty Pipe
Flow Limit 1
Flow Limit 2
Diag Alert
Total Limit 1
Control 1
Mode 1
High Limit 1
Low Limit 1
Hysteresis
Control 2
Mode 2
High Limit 2
Low Limit 2
Hysteresis
Total Control
Total Mode
Tot Hi Limit
Tot Low Limit
Hysteresis
Totalizer Units
Total Display
Elec Failure
Flow Display
Total Display
Language
Coil Open Ckt
Empty Pipe
Reverse Flow
Ground/Wiring
Process Noise
Elect Temp
Elec Coat 1
Elec Coat 2
Cont Meter Ver
Coil Over Curr
Sensr Elec Sat
Coil Power Lim
LOI Err Mask
Disp Auto Lock
Variable Map
Poll Address
Req Preams
Resp Preams
Burse Mode
Operating Mode
SP Config
Coil Frequency
PV Damping
Lo-Flow Cutoff
Burst Command
SP Control
Samples
% Rate
Tag
PV
SV
TV
QV
Description
Message
Time Limit
Device ID
PV Sensor S/N
Sensor Tag
Write Protect
Revision Num
Software Rev
Final Asmbl #
63
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
4.3
Field Communicator interface
The 8732EM transmitter can be configured with a Field Communicator using HART® Protocol
gaining access to the software functions, transmitter configurations, and diagnostic settings. Refer
to the Field Communicator Manual for detailed instructions on how to connect to the device.
4.3.1
Field Communicator user interface
The 8732E device driver uses conditional formatting menus. If the diagnostic is not active, the
diagnostic will not be displayed as a menu item in the Field Communicator. The Fast Key sequence
and menu trees will be resequenced accordingly.
There are two styles of interface available for Field Communicators. The traditional interface is
Figure 4-4. Traditional Interface
64
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Figure 4-5. Device Dashboard Interface
Table 4-1. Traditional Field Communicator Fast Keys
Function
Traditional Fast Keys
Process variables
Primary Variable (PV)
PV Percent of Range (PV % rnge)
PV Analog Output (AO) (PV Loop current)
Totalizer Setup
1, 1
1, 1, 1
1, 1, 2
1, 1, 3
1, 1, 4
Totalizer Units
1, 1, 4, 1
1, 1, 4, 2
1, 1, 4, 3
1, 1, 4, 4
1, 1, 4, 5
1, 1, 4, 6
1, 1, 4, 7
1, 1, 5
Gross Total
Net Total
Reverse Total
Start Totalizer
Stop Totalizer
Reset Totalizer
Pulse Output
Diagnostics
1, 2
Diag Controls
1, 2, 1
Diagnostic Controls
Empty Pipe
1, 2, 1, 1
1, 2, 1, 1, --(1)
1, 2, 1, 1, --(1)
1, 2, 1, 1, --(1)
1, 2, 1, 1, --(1)
Process Noise
Grounding/Wiring
Electrode Coating
65
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Table 4-1. Traditional Field Communicator Fast Keys (continued)
Function
Traditional Fast Keys
Electronics Temp
Reverse Flow
Continual Ver.
Coils
1, 2, 1, 1, --(1)
1, 2, 1, 2
1, 2, 1, 3
1, 2, 1, 3, 1 --(1)
1, 2, 1, 3, 2 --(1)
1, 2, 1, 3, 3 --(1)
1, 2, 1, 3, 4 --(1)
1, 2, 2
Electrodes
Transmitter
Analog Output
Basic Diagnostics
Self Test
1, 2, 2, 1
AO Loop Test
4 mA
1, 2, 2, 2
1, 2, 2, 2, 1
1, 2, 2, 2, 2
1, 2, 2, 2, 3
1, 2, 2, 2, 4
1, 2, 2, 2, 5
1, 2, 2, 3
20 mA
Simulate Alarm
Other
End
Pulse Output Loop Test
Tune Empty Pipe
EP Value
1, 2, 2, 4
1, 2, 2, 4, 1
1, 2, 2, 4, 2
1, 2, 2, 4, 3
1, 2, 2, 5
EP Trig. Level
EP Counts
Electronics Temp
Flow Limit 1
Control 1
1, 2, 2, 6
1, 2, 2, 6, 1
1, 2, 2, 6, 2
1, 2, 2, 6, 3
1, 2, 2, 6, 4
1, 2, 2, 6, 5
1, 2, 2, 7
Mode 1
High Limit 1
Low Limit 1
Flow Limit Hysteresis
Flow Limit 2
Control 2
1, 2, 2, 7, 1
1, 2, 2, 7, 2
1, 2, 2, 7, 3
1, 2, 2, 7, 4
1, 2, 2, 7, 5
1, 2, 2, 8
Mode 2
High Limit 2
Low Limit 2
Flow Limit Hysteresis
Total Limit
Total Control
Total Mode
Total High Limit
Total Low Limit
1, 2, 2, 8, 1
1, 2, 2, 8, 2
1, 2, 2, 8, 3
1, 2, 2, 8, 4
66
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Table 4-1. Traditional Field Communicator Fast Keys (continued)
Function
Traditional Fast Keys
Total Limit Hysteresis
Advanced Diagnostics
Electrode Coat
1, 2, 2, 8, 5
1, 2, 3
1, 2, 3, 1
EC Value
1, 2, 3, 1, 1
EC Level 1 Limit
1, 2, 3, 1, 2
EC Level 2 Limit
1, 2, 3, 1, 3
Max EC Value
1, 2, 3, 1, 4
Clear Max Electrode
8714i Cal Verification
Run 8714i Cal Verification
View Results
1, 2, 3, 1, 5
1, 2, 3, 2
1, 2, 3, 2, 1
1, 2, 3, 2, 2
Manual Results
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 1
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 1, 1
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 1, 2
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 1, 3
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 1, 4
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 1, 5
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 1, 6
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 1, 7
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 1, 8
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 1, 9
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 1, 10(2)
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 1, 11(2)
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 2
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 2, 1
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 2, 2
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 2, 3
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 2, 4
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 2, 5
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 2, 6
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 2, 7
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 2, 8
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 2, 9
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 2, 10(2)
1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 2, 11(2)
1, 2, 3, 2, 3
Test Condition
Test Criteria
8714i Test Result
Simulated Velocity
Actual Velocity
Velocity Deviation
Xmter Cal Test Result
Sensor Cal Deviation
Sensor Cal Test Result
Coil Circuit Test Result(2)
Electrode Circuit Test Result(2)
Continual Results
Continuous Limit
Simulated Velocity
Actual Velocity
Velocity Deviation
Coil Signature
Sensor Cal Deviation
Coil Resistance
Electrode Resistance
mA Expected
mA Actual(2)
mA Deviation(2)
Sensor Signature
Signature Values
1, 2, 3, 2, 3, 1
67
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Table 4-1. Traditional Field Communicator Fast Keys (continued)
Function
Traditional Fast Keys
Coil Resistance
Coil Signature
1, 2, 3, 2, 3, 1, 1
1, 2, 3, 2, 3, 1, 2
1, 2, 3, 2, 3, 1, 3
1, 2, 3, 2, 3, 2
1, 2, 3, 2, 3, 3
1, 2, 3, 2, 4
Electrode Resistance
Re-Signature Meter
Recall Last Saved Values
Set Pass/Fail Criteria
No Flow Limit
1, 2, 3, 2, 4, 1
1, 2, 3, 2, 4, 2
1, 2, 3, 2, 4, 3
1, 2, 3, 2, 4, 4
1, 2, 3, 2, 5
Flowing Limit
Empty Pipe Limit
Continuous Limit
Measurements
Manual Measurements
Coil Resistance
Coil Signature
1, 2, 3, 2, 5, 1
1, 2, 3, 2, 5, 1, 1
1, 2, 3, 2, 5, 1, 2
1, 2, 3, 2, 5, 1, 3
1, 2, 3, 2, 5, 2
1, 2, 3, 2, 5, 2, 1
1, 2, 3, 2, 5, 2, 2
1, 2, 3, 2, 5, 2, 3
1, 2, 3, 2, 5, 2, 4
1, 2, 3, 2, 5, 2, 5
1, 2, 3, 2, 5, 2, 6
1, 2, 3, 3
Electrode Resistance
Continual Measurements
Coil Resistance
Coil Signature
Electrode Resistance
Actual Velocity
mA Expected
mA Actual
4-20 mA Verify
4-20 mA Verification
View Results
1, 2, 3, 3, 1
1, 2, 3, 3, 2
Licensing
1, 2, 3, 4
License Status
1, 2, 3, 4, 1
Process Noise Detect
Line Noise Detection
Electrode Coating
8714i
1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 1 --(1)
1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2 --(1)
1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 3 --(1)
1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 4 --(1)
1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 5 --(1)
1, 2, 3, 4, 2
Digital I/O
License Key
Device ID
1, 2, 3, 4, 2, 1
1, 2, 3, 4, 2, 2
1, 2, 4
License Key
Diagnostic Variables
EP Value
1, 2, 4, 1
Electronics Temp
1, 2, 4, 2
68
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Table 4-1. Traditional Field Communicator Fast Keys (continued)
Function
Traditional Fast Keys
Line Noise
1, 2, 4, 3
5 Hz SNR
1, 2, 4, 4
37 Hz SNR
1, 2, 4, 5
Electrode Coat
EC Value
1, 2, 4, 6
1, 2, 4, 6, 1
1, 2, 4, 6, 2
1, 2, 4, 7
Max EC Value
Sig Power
8714i Results
1, 2, 4, 8
Manual Results
Test Condition
Test Criteria
1, 2, 4, 8, 1
1, 2, 4, 8, 1, 1
1, 2, 4, 8, 1, 2
1, 2, 4, 8, 1, 3
1, 2, 4, 8, 1, 4
1, 2, 4, 8, 1, 5
1, 2, 4, 8, 1, 6
1, 2, 4, 8, 1, 7
1, 2, 4, 8, 1, 8
1, 2, 4, 8, 1, 9
1, 2, 4, 8, 1, 10(2)
1, 2, 4, 8, 1, 11(2)
1, 2, 4, 8, 2
1, 2, 4, 8, 2, 1
1, 2, 4, 8, 2, 2
1, 2, 4, 8, 2, 3
1, 2, 4, 8, 2, 4
1, 2, 4, 8, 2, 5
1, 2, 4, 8, 2, 6
1, 2, 4, 8, 2, 7
1, 2, 4, 8, 2, 8
1, 2, 4, 8, 2, 9
1, 2, 4, 8, 2, 10(2)
1, 2, 4, 8, 2, 11(2)
1, 2, 4, 9
8714i Test Result
Simulated Velocity
Actual Velocity
Velocity Deviation
Xmtr Cal Test Result
Sensor Cal Deviation
Sensor Cal Test Result
Coil Circuit Test Result
Electrode Circuit Test Result
Continual Results
Continuous Limit
Simulated Velocity
Actual Velocity
Velocity Deviation
Coil Signature
Sensor Cal Deviation
Coil Resistance
Electrode Resistance
mA Expected
mA Actual
mA Deviation
Auto Zero Offset
Trims
1, 2, 5
D/A Trim
1, 2, 5, 1
Scaled D/A Trim
Digital Trim
1, 2, 5, 2
1, 2, 5, 3
69
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Table 4-1. Traditional Field Communicator Fast Keys (continued)
Function
Traditional Fast Keys
Auto Zero
1, 2, 5, 4
1, 2, 5, 5
1, 2, 6
Universal Trim
View Status
Basic setup
1, 3
Tag
1, 3, 1
Flow Units
1, 3, 2
PV Units
1, 3, 2, 1
1, 3, 2, 2
1, 3, 2, 2, 1
1, 3, 2, 2, 2
1, 3, 2, 2, 3
1, 3, 2, 2, 4
1, 3, 2, 2, 5
1, 3, 3
Special Units
Volume Unit
Base Volume Unit
Conversion Number
Base Time Unit
Flow Rate Unit
Line Size
PV URV
1, 3, 4
PV LRV
1, 3, 5
Calibration Number
PV Damping
Detailed setup
Additional Parameters
Coil Drive Frequency
Density Value
PV USL
1, 3, 6
1, 3, 7
1, 4
1, 4, 1
1, 4, 1, 1
1, 4, 1, 2
1, 4, 1, 3
1, 4, 1, 4
1, 4, 1, 5
1, 4, 2
PV LSL
PV Minimum Span
Configure Output
Analog Output
PV URV
1, 4, 2, 1
1, 4, 2, 1, 1
1, 4, 2, 1, 2
1, 4, 2, 1, 3
1, 4, 2, 1, 4
1, 4, 2, 1, 5
1, 4, 2, 1, 6
1, 4, 2, 1, 7
1, 4, 2, 1, 8
1, 4, 2, 1, 9
1, 4, 2, 1, 9, 1 --(1)
PV LRV
PV Loop Current
AO Alarm Type (PV Alrm typ)
AO Loop Test
D/A Trim
Scaled D/A Trim
Alarm Level
AO Diagnostic Alarm
Empty Pipe
70
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Table 4-1. Traditional Field Communicator Fast Keys (continued)
Function
Traditional Fast Keys
Reverse Flow
Ground/Wiring Fault
High Process Noise
Elect Temp Out of Range
Electrode Coat Limit 2
Totalizer Limit 1
Flow Limit 1
1, 4, 2, 1, 9, 2 --(1)
1, 4, 2, 1, 9, 3 --(1)
1, 4, 2, 1, 9, 4 --(1)
1, 4, 2, 1, 9, 5 --(1)
1, 4, 2, 1, 9, 6 --(1)
1, 4, 2, 1, 9, 7 --(1)
1, 4, 2, 1, 9, 8 --(1)
1, 4, 2, 1, 9, 9 --(1)
1, 4, 2, 1, 9, 10 --(1)
1, 4, 2, 2
Flow Limit 2
Cont. Meter Verification
Pulse Output
Pulse Scaling
Pulse Width
1, 4, 2, 2, 1
1, 4, 2, 2, 2
Pulse Mode
1, 4, 2, 2, 3
Pulse Out Loop Test
DI/DO Output (Digital I/O)
DI/DO 1
1, 4, 2, 2, 4
1, 4, 2, 3
1, 4, 2, 3, 1
Configure I/O 1
Input
1, 4, 2, 3, 1, 1
1, 4, 2, 3, 1, 1, 1
1, 4, 2, 3, 1, 1, 2
1, 4, 2, 3, 1, 1, 3
1, 4, 2, 3, 1, 2
1, 4, 2, 3, 1, 3
1, 4, 2, 3, 1, 4
1, 4, 2, 3, 2
Output
Not Available/Off
DIO 1 Control
Digital Input 1
Digital Output 1
DO 2
Flow Limit 1
1, 4, 2, 3, 3
Control 1
1, 4, 2, 3, 3, 1
1, 4, 2, 3, 3, 2
1, 4, 2, 3, 3, 3
1, 4, 2, 3, 3, 4
1, 4, 2, 3, 3, 5
1, 4, 2, 3, 4
Mode 1
High Limit 1
Low Limit 1
Flow Limit Hysteresis
Flow Limit 2
Control 2
1, 4, 2, 3, 4, 1
1, 4, 2, 3, 4, 2
1, 4, 2, 3, 4, 3
1, 4, 2, 3, 4, 4
1, 4, 2, 3, 4, 5
1, 4, 2, 3, 5
Mode 2
High Limit 2
Low Limit 2
Flow Limit Hysteresis
Total Limit
Total Control
1, 4, 2, 3, 5, 1
71
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Table 4-1. Traditional Field Communicator Fast Keys (continued)
Function
Traditional Fast Keys
Total Mode
1, 4, 2, 3, 5, 2
1, 4, 2, 3, 5, 3
1, 4, 2, 3, 5, 4
1, 4, 2, 3, 5, 5
1, 4, 2, 3, 6
1, 4, 2, 3, 6, --(1)
1, 4, 2, 3, 6, --(1)
1, 4, 2, 3, 6, --(1)
1, 4, 2, 3, 6, --(1)
1, 4, 2, 3, 6, --(1)
1, 4, 2, 3, 6, --(1)
1, 4, 2, 3, 6, --(1)
1, 4, 2, 3, 6, --(1)
1, 4, 2, 3, 6, --(1)
1, 4, 2, 3, 6, --(1)
1, 4, 2, 4
Total High Limit
Total Low Limit
Total Limit Hysteresis
Diagnostic Status Alert
Electronics Failure
Coil Open Circuit
Empty Pipe
Reverse Flow
Ground/Wiring Fault
High Process Noise
Elect Temp Out of Range
Electrode Coat Limit 1
Electrode Coat Limit 2
Cont. Meter Verification
Reverse Flow
Totalizer Setup
Totalizer Units
Gross Total
1, 4, 2, 5
1, 4, 2, 5, 1
1, 4, 2, 5, 2
Net Total
1, 4, 2, 5, 3
Reverse Total
Start Totalizer
Stop Totalizer
Reset Totalizer
Alarm Levels
1, 4, 2, 5, 4
1, 4, 2, 5, 5
1, 4, 2, 5, 6
1, 4, 2, 5, 7
1, 4, 2, 6
Alarm Level
1, 4, 2, 6, 1
Hi Alarm
1, 4, 2, 6, 2
Hi Sat
1, 4, 2, 6, 3
Low Sat
1, 4, 2, 6, 4
Low Alarm
1, 4, 2, 6, 5
HART Output
Variable Mapping
PV is
1, 4, 2, 7
1, 4, 2, 7, 1
1, 4, 2, 7, 1, 1
1, 4, 2, 7, 1, 2
1, 4, 2, 7, 1, 3
1, 4, 2, 7, 1, 4
1, 4, 2, 7, 2
SV is
TV is
QV is
Poll Address
Num Req Preams
1, 4, 2, 7, 3
72
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Table 4-1. Traditional Field Communicator Fast Keys (continued)
Function
Traditional Fast Keys
Num Resp Preams
Burst Mode
Burst Option
PV
1, 4, 2, 7, 4
1, 4, 2, 7, 5
1, 4, 2, 7, 6
1, 4, 2, 7, 6, --(1)
1, 4, 2, 7, 6, --(1)
1, 4, 2, 7, 6, --(1)
1, 4, 2, 7, 6, --(1)
1, 4, 3
% Range/Current
Process Vars/Current
Dynamic Vars
LOI Config
Language
1, 4, 3, 1
Flowrate Display
Totalizer Display
Display Lock
Meter type
1, 4, 3, 2
1, 4, 3, 3
1, 4, 3, 4
1, 4, 3, 5
LOI Error Mask
Signal Processing
Operating Mode
Man Config DSP
Status
1, 4, 3, 6
1, 4, 4
1, 4, 4, 1
1, 4, 4, 2
1, 4, 4, 2, 1
1, 4, 4, 2, 2
1, 4, 4, 2, 3
1, 4, 4, 2, 4
1, 4, 4, 3
Samples
% Limit
Time Limit
Coil Drive Freq
Low Flow Cutoff
PV Damping
Universal Trim
Device Info
1, 4, 4, 4
1, 4, 4, 5
1, 4, 5
1, 4, 6
Manufacturer
Tag
1, 4, 6, 1
1, 4, 6, 2
Descriptor
1, 4, 6, 3
Message
1, 4, 6, 4
Date
1, 4, 6, 5
Device ID
1, 4, 6, 6
PV Sensor S/N
Sensor Tag
1, 4, 6, 7
1, 4, 6, 8
Write protect
Revision No.
Universal Rev
Transmitter Rev
1, 4, 6, 9
1, 4, 6, 10(2)
1, 4, 6, 10, 1--(2)
1, 4, 6, 10, 2--(2)
73
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Table 4-1. Traditional Field Communicator Fast Keys (continued)
Function
Traditional Fast Keys
Software Rev
1, 4, 6, 10, 3--(2)
1, 4, 6, 10, 4--(2)
1, 4, 6, 11(2)
1, 4, 6, 11,1--(2)
1, 4, 6, 11, 2--(2)
1, 4, 6, 11, 3--(2)
1, 4, 6, 11, 4--(2)
1, 4, 6, 11, 5--(2)
1, 4, 7
Final Assembly #
Construction Materials
Flange Type
Flange Material
Electrode Type
Electrode Material
Liner Material
Device Reset
Review
1, 5
(1) These items are in a list format without numeric labels.
(2) To access these features, you must scroll to this option in the HART Field Communicator.
Table 4-2. Device Dashboard Fast Keys
Function
Overview
Fast Keys
1
Device Status
Flow Rate
1,1
1,2
Analog Output Value
Upper Range Value
Lower Range Value
Run Meter Verificaiton
Meter Verification Results
Device Information
Tag
1,3
1,4
1,5
1,6
1,7
1,8
1,8,1,1
1,8,1,2
1,8,1,3
1,8,1,4
1,8,1,5
1,8,1,6
1,8,1,7
1,8,1,8
1,8,2,1
Manufacturer
Model
Final Assembly Number
Device ID
Date
Description
Message
Universal Revision
Device Revision
1,8,2,2
Software Revision
Hardware Revision
DD Revision
1,8,2,3
1,8,2,4
1,8,2,5
1,8,3,1
1,8,3,2
1,8,3,3
1,8,3,4
1,8,3,5
1,8,3,6
1,8,3,7
Sensor Serial Number
Sensor Tag
Calibration Number
Line Size
Lower Sensor Limit
Upper Sensor Limit
Minimum Span
74
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Table 4-2. Device Dashboard Fast Keys (continued)
Function
Fast Keys
Liner Material
1,8,3,8,1
1,8,3,8,2
1,8,3,8,3
1,8,3,8,4
1,8,3,8,5
1,8,4,1
1,8,4,2
1,8,4,3
1,8,4,4
1,8,4,5
1,8,4,6
1,8,4,7
1,8,5
Electrode Type
Electrode Material
Flange Type
Flange Material
Write Protect
Alarm Direction
Alarm Type
High Alarm
High Saturation
Low Saturation
Low Alarm
Licenses
Configure
2
Guided Setup
2,1
Initial Setup
2,1,1
Basic Setup
2,1,1,1
2,1,1,2
2,1,1,3
2,1,2
Configure Display
Special Units
Outputs
Analog Output
Pulse Output
2,1,2,1
2,1,2,2
2,1,2,3
2,1,2,4
2,1,2,5
2,1,2,7
2,1,2,8
2,1,3
Dicrete Input/Output
Totalizer
Reverse Flow
Burst Mode
Variable Mapping
Diagnostics
Configure Basic Diagnostics
Upgrade License
Configure Process Diagnostics
Configure Meter Verification
Re-Baseline Sensor
Alerts
2,1,3,1
2,1,3,2
2,1,3,3
2,1,3,4
2,1,3,5
2,1,4
User Alert Conifguration
Analog Alarm Configuration
Optimize Signal Processing
Manual Setup
2,1,4,1
2,1,4,2
2,1,5
2,2
Flow Units
2,2,1,2
2,2,1,3,2
2,2,1,3,3
2,2,1,3,4
2,2,1,4,1
2,2,1,4,2
2,2,1,5,1
2,2,1,5,2
Lower Range Value
Upper Range Value
Damping
Calibration Number
Line Size
Language
Flow Display
75
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Table 4-2. Device Dashboard Fast Keys (continued)
Function
Fast Keys
Totalizer Display
Display Lock
2,2,1,5,3
2,2,1,5,4
2,2,2,1,6
2,2,2,2,2
2,2,2,2,3
2,2,2,2,4
2,2,2,3,1
2,2,2,3,2
2,2,2,3,3
2,2,2,3,4
2,2,2,3,5
2,2,3,1,1
2,2,3,1,3
2,2,3,2,1
2,2,3,2,2
2,2,3,2,3
2,2,3,2,4
2,2,4,1,1
2,2,4,1,2
2,2,4,1,3
2,2,4,2
Density
Pulse Mode
Pulse Scaling
Pulse Width
Net Total
Gross Total
Reverse Total
Totalizer Control
Totalizer Units
Polling Address
Burst Option
Primary Variable
Secondary Variable
Third Variable
Fourth Variable
Discrete I/O 1 Direction
Dicrete Input 1
Discrete Output 1
Discrete Output 2
Flow Limit 1
2,2,4,3
High Limit 1
2,2,4,3,1
2,2,4,3,2
2,2,4,3,3
2,2,4,3,4
2,2,4,4
Low Limit 1
Limit 1 Control
Limit 1 Status Alert
Flow Limit 2
High Limit 2
2,2,4,4,1
2,2,4,4,2
2,2,4,4,3
2,2,4,4,4
2,2,4,6
Low Limit 2
Limit 2 Control
Limit 2 Status Alert
Flow Hysteresis
Totalizer Limit
2,2,4,5
Totalizer High Limit
Totalizer LowLimit
Totalizer Limit Control
Totalizer Limit Status Alert
Totalizer Hysteresis
Diagnostics Status Alert
Enable Diagnostics
License Status
2,2,4,5,1
2,2,4,5,2
2,2,4,5,3
2,2,4,5,4
2,2,4,7
2,2,4,8
2,2,5,1
2,2,5,2
Empty Pipe Value
Empty Pipe Trigger Level
Empty Pipe Counts
Electrode Coating Value
Electrode Coating Level 1 Limit
Electrode Coating Level 2 Limit
2,2,5,3,1
2,2,5,3,2
2,2,5,3,3
2,2,5,6,1
2,2,5,6,2
2,2,5,6,3
76
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Table 4-2. Device Dashboard Fast Keys (continued)
Function
Fast Keys
Electrode Coating Maximum Value
Reset Maximum Electrode Coating Value
Diagnostic Analog Alarm
Recall Last Baseline
2,2,5,6,4
2,2,5,6,5
2,2,5,9
2,2,6,1,5
2,2,6,3,1
2,2,6,3,2
2,2,6,3,3
2,2,6,4,1
No Flow Limit
Flowing Limit
Empty Pipe Limit
Continuous Meter Verification Limit
Enable Continuous Meter Verification Parameters 2,2,6,4,2
Coils
2,2,6,4,2,1
2,2,6,4,2,2
2,2,6,4,2,3
2,2,6,4,2,4
2,2,8,3
2,2,8,4
2,2,8,5
2,2,8,6,1
2,2,8,6,2
2,2,8,6,3
2,2,8,6,4
2,2,9,1,1
2,2,9,3,1
2,2,9,3,2
2,2,9,3,3
2,2,9,4,1
2,2,9,4,2
2,2,9,4,3,1
2,2,9,4,3,2
2,2,9,4,3,3
2,2,9,4,3,4
2,2,9,4,3,5
2,2,9,5,2
2,3
Electrodes
Transmitter
Analog Output (Continuous Meter Verification)
Coil Drive Frequency
Auto Zero
Digital Signal Processing (DSP) Operation
DSP Control
Number of Samples
Percent of Rate
Time Limit
Tag
Date
Description
Message
Sensor Serial Number
Sensor Tag
Liner Material
Electrode Type
Electrode Material
Flange Type
Flange Material
Alarm Type
Alert Setup
Flow/Totalizer Limits
Diagnostics
2,3,1
2,3,2
Flow Limit 1
2,3,3
Flow Limit 2
2,3,4
Totalizer Limit
Analog Alarm
Discrete Output Alert
Calibration
2,3,5
2,3,6
2,3,7
2,4
Universal Trim
Service tools
Alerts
2,4,1
3
3,1
77
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Table 4-2. Device Dashboard Fast Keys (continued)
Function
Fast Keys
Refresh Alerts
3,1,1
Active Alerts
3,1,2
Variables
3,2
Flow Rate
3,2,1,1
3,2,1,2
3,2,1,3
3,2,1,4,1
3,2,1,4,2
3,2,1,4,3
3,2,2,1
3,2,2,2
3,2,2,3
3,2,3,1
3,2,3,2
3,2,3,3,1
3,2,3,3,2
3,2,3,3,3
3,2,4
Pulse Output
Analog Output
Net Total
Gross Total
Reverse Total
Empty Pipe Value
Electronics Temperature
Coil Current
Line Noise
Electrode Coating Value
5 Hz Signal-to-Noise Ratio
37 Hz Signal-to-Noise Ratio
Signal Power
Continuous Meter Verification
Baseline Coil Resistance
3,2,4,1,1
Baseline Coil Inductance
3,2,4,1,2
3,2,4,1,3
3,2,4,2
3,2,4,2,1
3,2,4,2,2
3,2,4,2,3
3,2,4,2,4
3,2,4,3
3,2,4,3,1
3,2,4,3,2
3,2,4,3,3
3,2,4,4
3,2,4,4,1
3,2,4,4,2
3,2,4,4,3
3,3
Baseline Electrode Resistance
Continuous Sensor Measurements
Continuous Measured Coil Resistance
Continuous Measured Coil Inductance
Continuous Coil Baseline Deviation
Continuous Measured Electrode Resistance
Continuous Transmitter Measurements
Continuous Simulated Velocity
Continuous Actual Velocity
Continuous Velocity Deviation
Continuous Analog Output Measurements
Continuous Expected mA Value
Continuous Actual mA Value
Continuous mA Deviation
Trends
Flow Rate Trend
3,3,1
Empty Pipe Trend
3,3,2
Electronics Temperature Trend
Line Noise Trend
3,3,3
3,3,4
5 Hz Signal-to-Noise Ratio Trend
37 Hz Signal-to-Noise Ratio Trend
Coil Inductance Trend
3,3,5
3,3,6
3,3,7
Coil Resistance Trend
3,3,8
Electrode Resistance Trend
3,3,9
78
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Table 4-2. Device Dashboard Fast Keys (continued)
Function
Fast Keys
3,4
Maintenance
Re-Baseline Sensor
3,4,1,1,4
3,4,1,1,5
3,4,1,2,1
3,4,1,2,2
3,4,1,2,3
3,4,1,3
Recall Last Baseline
No Flow Limit
Flowing Limit
Empty Pipe Limit
Manual Sensor Measurements
Manual Measured Coil Resistance
Manual Measured Coil Inductance
Manual Measured Electrode Resistance
Run Manual Meter Verification
Manual Meter Verification Results
Manual Coil Circuit Test Result
Manual Electrode Circuit Test Result
Manual Sensor Deviation
Manual Sensot Test Result
Manual Simulated Velocity
Manual Actual Velocity
3,4,1,3,1
3,4,1,3,2
3,4,1,3,3
3,4,1,4
3,4,1,5
3,4,1,5,1,3
3,4,1,5,1,6
3,4,1,5,2,3
3,4,1,5,2,4
3,4,1,5,3,1
3,4,1,5,3,2
3,4,1,5,3,3
3,4,1,5,3,4
3,4,1,5,4,1
3,4,1,5,4,2
3,4,2,2
Manual Transmitter Deviation
Manual Transmitter Test Result
Manul Test Conditions
Manual Overall Test Result
Continuous Meter Verification Limit
Enable Continuous Meter Verification Parameters 3,4,2,3
Coils
3,4,2,3,1
3,4,2,3,2
3,4,2,3,3
3,4,2,3,4
3,4,3
Electrodes
Transmitter
Analog Output (Continuous Meter Verification)
4-20 mA Verification
Run Manual 4-20 mA Verification
4 mA Measurement
12 mA Measurement
20 mA Measurement
Low Alarm Measurement
High Alarm Measurement
Analog D/A Trim
3,4,3,1
3,4,3,2
3,4,3,3
3,4,3,4
3,4,3,5
3,4,3,6
3,4,4,5
3,4,4,6
3,4,5
Scaled Analog D/A Trim
Electronics (Digital) Trim
Master Reset
3,4,6
Simulate
3,5
Analog Loop Test
3,5,1,1
3,5,2,1
Pulse Loop Test
79
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Figure 4-6. Field Communicator Traditional Menu Tree (Basic Setup and Detailed Setup)
Home
1 Device Setup
2 PV
Device Setup
1 Process Variables
2 Diagnostics
3 Basic Setup
4 Detailed Setup
5 Review
3 PV AO
4 PV LRV
5 PV URV
Basic Setup
1 Tag
2 Flow Units
3 Line Size
Flow Units
1 PV Units
4 PV URV
2 Special Units
Special Units
1 Volume Unit
5 PV LRV
6 Calibration Number
7 PV Damping
2 Base Volume Unit
AO Diagnostic Alarm
Empty Pipe
3
Conversion Number
4 Base Time Unit
5 Flow Rate Unit
Reverse Flow
Ground/Wiring Fault
High Process Noise
Elect Temp Out of Range
Electrode Coat Limit 2
Totalizer Limit 1
Detailed Setup
Analog Output
1 PV URV
2 PV LRV
3 PV Loop Current
4 PV Alarm Type
5 AO Loop Test
6 D/A Trim
7 Scaled D/A Trim
8 Alarm Level
9 AO Diagnostic Alarm
Additional Params
1 Coil Drive Freq
2 Density Value
3 PV USL
1 Additional Params
2 Configure Output
3 LOI Config
Flow Limit 1
4 Signal Processing
5 Universal Trim
6 Device Info
4 PV LSL
Flow Limit 2
5 PV Min Span
Cont. Meter Verification
7 Device Reset
DI/DO 1
1 Configure I/O 1
2 DIO 1 Control
3 Digital Input 1
4 Digital Output 1
Configure Output
1 Analog Output
2 Pulse Output
3 Digital I/O
4 Reverse Flow
5 Totalizer Setup
6 Alarm Levels
7 HART Output
Pulse Output
1 Pulse Scaling
2 Pulse Width
3 Pulse Mode
4 Pulse Out Loop Test
Configure I/O 1
Input
Output
Digital I/O
Not Available/Off
1 DI/DO 1
2 DO 2
Flow Limit 1
1 Control 1
2 Mode 1
3 High Limit 1
4 Low Limit 1
5 Flow Limit Hysteresis
3 Flow Limit 1
4 Flow Limit 2
5 Total Limit
6
Diagnostic Status
Alert
Flow Limit 2
1 Control 2
2 Mode 2
3 High Limit 2
4 Low Limit 2
5 Flow Limit Hysteresis 2
Totalizer Setup
1 Totalizer Units
2 Gross Total
Total Limit
1 Total Control
2 Total Mode
3 Net Total
3 Total Hi Limit
4 Total Low Limit
5 Total Limit Hysteresis
4 Reverse Total
5 Start Totalizer
6 Stop Totalizer
7 Reset Totalizer
Diagnostic Status Alert
Electronics Failure
Coil Open Circuit
Alarm Levels
1 Alarm Level
2 Hi Alarm
3 Hi Sat
Empty Pipe
Reverse Flow
Ground/Wiring Fault
High Process Noise
Elect Temp Out of Range
Electrode Coat Limit 1
Electrode Coat Limit 2
Cont. Meter Verification
Coil Over Current
4 Low Sat
5 Low Alarm
LOI Config
1 Language
Sensor Electrode Saturated
Coil Power Limit
2 Flowrate Display
3 Totalizer Display
4 Display Lock
5 Meter Type
HART Output
Variable Mapping
1 PV is
1 Variable Mapping
2 Poll Address
2 SV is
3 Num Req Preams
4 Num Resp Preams
5 Burse Mode
6 LOI Error Mask
3 TV is
4 QV is
6 Burst Option
Burst Option
PV
Signal Processing
1 Operating Mode
2 Man Config DSP
3 Coil Drive Freq
4 Low Flow Cutoff
5 PV Damping
% Range/Current
Process Vars/Current
Dynamic Vars
Man Config DSP
1 Status
2 Samples
3 % Limit
4 Time Limit
Revision No.
Device Info
1 Manufacturer
2 Tag
1 Universal Rev
2 Transmitter Rev
3 Software Rev
4 Final Assembly #
3 Descriptor
4 Message
5 Date
6 Device ID
7 PV Sensor S/N
8 Sensor Tag
9 Write protect
Revision No.
Construction Materials
Construction Materials
1 Flange Type
2 Flange Material
3 Electrode Type
4 Electrode Material
5 Liner Material
80
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
Figure 4-7. Field Communicator Traditional Menu Tree (Process Variables and Diagnostics)
Home
1 Device Setup
2 PV
Device Setup
1 Process Variables
2 Diagnostics
3 Basic Setup
4 Detailed Setup
5 Review
3 PV AO
4 PV LRV
5 PV URV
Basic Setup
1 Tag
2 Flow Units
3 Line Size
Flow Units
1 PV Units
4 PV URV
2 Special Units
Special Units
5 PV LRV
6 Calibration Number
7 PV Damping
1 Volume Unit
2 Base Volume Unit
AO Diagnostic Alarm
Empty Pipe
3
Conversion Number
4 Base Time Unit
5 Flow Rate Unit
Reverse Flow
Ground/Wiring Fault
High Process Noise
Elect Temp Out of Range
Electrode Coat Limit 2
Totalizer Limit 1
Detailed Setup
Analog Output
1 PV URV
2 PV LRV
3 PV Loop Current
4 PV Alarm Type
5 AO Loop Test
6 D/A Trim
7 Scaled D/A Trim
8 Alarm Level
9 AO Diagnostic Alarm
Additional Params
1 Coil Drive Freq
2 Density Value
3 PV USL
1 Additional Params
2 Configure Output
3 LOI Config
Flow Limit 1
4 Signal Processing
5 Universal Trim
6 Device Info
4 PV LSL
Flow Limit 2
5 PV Min Span
Cont. Meter Verification
7 Device Reset
DI/DO 1
1 Configure I/O 1
2 DIO 1 Control
3 Digital Input 1
4 Digital Output 1
Configure Output
1 Analog Output
2 Pulse Output
3 Digital I/O
Pulse Output
1 Pulse Scaling
2 Pulse Width
4 Reverse Flow
5 Totalizer Setup
6 Alarm Levels
7 HART Output
3 Pulse Mode
4 Pulse Out Loop Test
Configure I/O 1
Input
Output
Digital I/O
Not Available/Off
1 DI/DO 1
2 DO 2
Flow Limit 1
1 Control 1
2 Mode 1
3 High Limit 1
4 Low Limit 1
5 Flow Limit Hysteresis
3 Flow Limit 1
4 Flow Limit 2
5 Total Limit
6
Diagnostic Status
Alert
Flow Limit 2
1 Control 2
2 Mode 2
3 High Limit 2
4 Low Limit 2
5 Flow Limit Hysteresis 2
Totalizer Setup
1 Totalizer Units
2 Gross Total
Total Limit
1 Total Control
2 Total Mode
3 Net Total
3 Total Hi Limit
4 Total Low Limit
5 Total Limit Hysteresis
4 Reverse Total
5 Start Totalizer
6 Stop Totalizer
7 Reset Totalizer
Diagnostic Status Alert
Electronics Failure
Coil Open Circuit
Alarm Levels
1 Alarm Level
2 Hi Alarm
3 Hi Sat
Empty Pipe
Reverse Flow
Ground/Wiring Fault
High Process Noise
Elect Temp Out of Range
Electrode Coat Limit 1
Electrode Coat Limit 2
Cont. Meter Verification
Coil Over Current
4 Low Sat
5 Low Alarm
LOI Config
Sensor Electrode Saturated
Coil Power Limit
1 Language
2 Flowrate Display
3 Totalizer Display
4 Display Lock
5 Meter Type
HART Output
Variable Mapping
1 PV is
1 Variable Mapping
2 Poll Address
2 SV is
3 Num Req Preams
4 Num Resp Preams
5 Burse Mode
6 LOI Error Mask
3 TV is
4 QV is
6 Burst Option
Burst Option
PV
Signal Processing
1 Operating Mode
2 Man Config DSP
3 Coil Drive Freq
4 Low Flow Cutoff
5 PV Damping
% Range/Current
Process Vars/Current
Dynamic Vars
Man Config DSP
1 Status
2 Samples
3 % Limit
4 Time Limit
Revision No.
Device Info
1 Manufacturer
2 Tag
1 Universal Rev
2 Transmitter Rev
3 Software Rev
4 Final Assembly #
3 Descriptor
4 Message
5 Date
6 Device ID
7 PV Sensor S/N
8 Sensor Tag
9 Write protect
Revision No.
Construction Materials
Construction Materials
1 Flange Type
2 Flange Material
3 Electrode Type
4 Electrode Material
5 Liner Material
81
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
4.4
Process variables
LOI menu path
N/A
1,1
1
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
Process variables are available through the Field Communicator or AMS software suite. These
variables display flow in several ways that reflect your needs and the configuration of your
flowmeter. When commissioning a flowmeter, review each process variable, its function and output,
and take corrective action if necessary before using the flowmeter in a process application.
Primary variable (PV) - The actual measured flow rate of the process fluid. Use the flow units function
to select the units for your application.
Percent of range - The process variable as a percentage of the analog output range, provides an
indication where the current flow of the meter is within the configured range of the flowmeter. For
example, the analog output range may be defined as 0 gal/min to 20 gal/min. If the measured flow is
10 gal/min, the percent of range is 50 percent.
Analog output - The analog output variable provides the analog value for the flow rate. The analog
output refers to the industry standard output in the 4-20 mA range. The analog output and 4-20 mA
loop can be verified using the Analog Feedback diagnostic capability internal to the transmitter (See
Pulse output - The pulse output variable provides the pulse value in terms of a frequency for the flow
rate.
4.4.1
4.4.2
PV - Primary variable
Home screen if configured to display flow
LOI menu path
1,1,1
1,2
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
The primary variable shows the current measured flow rate. This value determines the analog output
from the transmitter.
PV - Percent of range
Home screen if configured to display percent span
LOI menu path
1,1,2
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
3,4,4,2
The PV% range shows where in the flow range the current flow value is as a percentage of the
configured span.
84
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
4.4.3
4.4.4
PV - Analog output
N/A
LOI menu path
1,1,3
1,3
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
The PV analog output displays the mA output of the transmitter corresponding to the measured
flow rate.
Pulse output
N/A
LOI menu path
1,1,5
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
3,2,1,2
The pulse output displays the value of the pulse signal.
85
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 4: Operation
August 2015
86
Operation
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
Section 5
Advanced Configuration
Functionality
Configure outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 87
Additional parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 106
5.1
Introduction
This section contains information for advanced configuration parameters.
The software configuration settings for the Rosemount 8732EM can be accessed through a
HART®-based communicator, Local Operator Interface (LOI), AMS, or through a control system.
Before operating the 8732EM in an actual installation, you should review all of the factory set
configuration data to ensure that they reflect the current application.
5.2
Configure outputs
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2
2,2,2
The configure outputs functionality is used to configure advanced features that control the
analog, pulse, auxiliary, and totalizer outputs of the transmitter.
5.2.1
Analog output
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Analog
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,1
2,2,2,1
The analog output function is used to configure all of the features of the 4-20 mA output.
Upper range value
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Analog, PV URV
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,1
2,2,2,1,4
The upper range value (URV) sets the 20 mA point for the analog output. This value is typically
set to full-scale flow. The units that appear will be the same as those selected under the units
parameter. The URV may be set between –39.3 ft/s to 39.3 ft/s (–12 m/s to 12 m/s) or the
equivalent range based on the selected flow units. There must be at least 1 ft/s (0.3 m/s) span or
equivalent between the URV and LRV.
87
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
Lower range value
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Analog, PV LRV
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,1
2,2,2,1,3
The lower range value (LRV) sets the 4 mA point for the analog output. This value is typically set
to zero flow. The units that appear will be the same as those selected under the units parameter.
The LRV may be set between –39.3 ft/s to 39.3 ft/s (–12 m/s to 12 m/s) or the equivalent range
based on the selected flow units. There must be at least 1 ft/s (0.3 m/s) span or equivalent
between the URV and LRV.
Alarm type
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Analog, Alarm Type
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,1,4
2,2,9,5,1
The analog output alarm type displays the position of the alarm switch on the electronics board.
There are two available positions for this switch:
High
Low
Alarm level
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Analog, Alarm Level
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,1,8 or 1,4,2,6
2,2,9,5,2
The alarm level configuration will drive the transmitter to preset values if an alarm occurs. There
are two options:
Table 5-1. Rosemount Values
Level
4-20 mA saturation
4-20 mA alarm
Low
3.9 mA
3.75 mA
22.5 mA
High
20.8 mA
Table 5-2. NAMUR Values
Level
4-20 mA saturation
4-20 mA alarm
Low
3.8 mA
3.5 mA
High
20.5 mA
22.6 mA
88
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
AO diagnostic alarm
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Analog, AO Diag Alarm
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,1,9
2,2,5,9
There are diagnostics that, when under active conditions, do not drive the analog output to
alarm level. The AO diagnostic alarm menu enables selection of these diagnostics to be
associated with an analog alarm. If any of the selected diagnostics are active, it will cause the
analog output to go to the configured alarm level. For a list of diagnostic alarms that can be
Table 5-3. Analog Alarm Diagnostic Options
Diagnostic
LOI Menu Path
Fast Keys
Description
Detailed Setup, Output
Config, Analog, AO Diag
Alarm, Empty Pipe
Drive to an alarm state when
empty pipe is detected.
Empty Pipe (1)
1,4,2,1,9,1
Detailed Setup, Output
Config, Analog, AO Diag
Alarm, Reverse Flow
Drive to an alarm state when
reverse flow is detected.
Reverse Flow
1,4,2,1,9,2
1,4,2,1,9,3
1,4,2,1,9,4
1,4,2,1,9,5
Detailed Setup, Output
Config, Analog, AO Diag
Alarm, Ground/Wiring
Drive to an alarm state when
grounding or wiring fault is
detected.
Grounding / Wiring
Fault(1)
Detailed Setup, Output
Drive to an alarm state when the
transmitter detects high levels of
process noise.
High Process Noise(1) Config, Analog, AO Diag
Alarm, Process Noise
Electronics
Detailed Setup, Output
Config, Analog, AO Diag
Alarm, Elect Temp
Drive to an alarm state when the
temperature of the electronics
exceeds allowable limits
Temperature Out of
Range(1)
Drive to an alarm state when
electrode coating reaches a point
where it impacts the flow
measurement
Detailed Setup, Output
Config, Analog, AO Diag
Alarm, Elec Coating
Electrode Coating
Limit 2(1)
1,4,2,1,9,6
1,4,2,1,9,7
Drive to an alarm state when the
totalizer value exceeds the
parameters set in the totalizer
limit configuration (see page 5-x
for more details on this
Detailed Setup, Output
Config, Analog, AO Diag
Alarm, Total Limit
Totalizer Limit 1
functionality)
Drive to an alarm state when the
flow rate exceeds the parameters
set in the flow limit 1
Detailed Setup, Output
Config, Analog, AO Diag
Alarm, Flow Limit 1
Flow Limit 1
Flow Limit 2
1,4,2,1,9,8
configuration (see page 5-x for
more details on this functionality)
Drive to an alarm state when the
flow rate exceeds the parameters
set in the flow limit 2
configuration (see page 5-x for
more details on this functionality)
Detailed Setup, Output
Config, Analog, AO Diag
Alarm, Flow Limit 2
1,4,2,1,9,9
Drive to an alarm state when the
continuous meter verification
diagnostic detects a failure of one
of the tests
Detailed Setup, Output
Config, Analog, AO Diag
Alarm, Cont Meter Ver
Continuous Meter
Verification(1)
1,4,2,1,9,--(2)
(2) To access these features, you must scroll to this option in the HART Field Communicator.
89
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
5.2.2
Pulse output
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Pulse
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,2
2,2,2,2
Under this function the pulse output of the 8732EM can be configured.
Pulse scaling
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Pulse, Pulse Scaling
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,2,1
2,2,2,2,3
Transmitter may be commanded to supply a specified frequency between 1 pulse/ day at 39.37
ft/sec (12 m/s) to 10,000Hz at 1 ft/sec (0.3 m/s).
Note
Line size, special units, and density must be selected prior to configuration of the pulse scaling
factor.
The pulse output scaling equates one transistor switch closure pulse to a selectable number of
volume units. The volume unit used for scaling pulse output is taken from the numerator of the
configured flow units. For example, if gal/min had been chosen when selecting the flow unit, the
volume unit displayed would be gallons.
Note
The pulse output scaling is designed to operate between 0 and 10,000Hz. The minimum
conversion factor value is found by dividing the minimum span (in units of volume per second)
by 10,000Hz.
Note
The maximum pulse scaling frequency for transmitters with an intrinsically safe output (output
option code B) is 5000Hz.
When selecting pulse output scaling, the maximum pulse rate is 10,000Hz. With the 110
percent over range capability, the absolute limit is 11,000Hz. For example, if you want the
Rosemount 8732EM to pulse every time 0.01 gallons pass through the sensor, and the flow rate
is 10,000 gal/min, you will exceed the 10,000Hz full-scale limit:
The best choice for this parameter depends upon the required resolution, the number of digits
in the totalizer, the extent of range required, and the maximum frequency limit of the external
counter.
90
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
Pulse width
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Pulse, Pulse Width
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,2,2
2,2,2,2,4
The factory default pulse width is 0.5 ms.
The width, or duration, of the pulse can be adjusted to match the requirements of different
1000Hz). The transmitter will accept values from 0.1 ms to 650 ms.
For frequencies higher than 1000Hz, it is recommended to set the pulse mode to 50% duty cycle
by setting the pulse mode to frequency output.
The pulse width will limit the maximum frequency output, If the pulse width is set too wide
(more than 1/2 the period of the pulse) the transmitter will limit the pulse output. See example
below.
Figure 5-1. Pulse Output
Example
If pulse width is set to 100 ms, the maximum output is 5Hz; for a pulse width of 0.5 ms, the
maximum output would be 1000Hz (at the maximum frequency output there is a 50% duty
cycle).
Pulse width
Minimum period (50% duty cycle)
Maximum frequency
100 ms
200 ms
0.5 ms
1.0 ms
91
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
To achieve the greatest maximum frequency output, set the pulse width to the lowest value
that is consistent with the requirements of the pulse output power source, pulse driven external
totalizer, or other peripheral equipment.
Example
The maximum flow rate is 10,000 gpm. Set the pulse output scaling such that the transmitter
outputs 10,000Hz at 10,000 gpm.
Note
Changes to pulse width are only required when there is a minimum pulse width required for
external counters, relays, etc.
Example
The external counter is ranged for 350 gpm and pulse is set for one gallon. Assuming the pulse
width is 0.5 ms, the maximum frequency output is 5.833Hz.
92
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
Example
The upper range value (20mA) is 3000 gpm. To obtain the highest resolution of the pulse
output, 10,000Hz is scaled to the full scale analog reading.
Pulse mode
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Pulse, Pulse Mode
1,4,2,2,3
2,2,2,2,2
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
The pulse mode configures the frequency output of the pulse. It can be set to either 50% duty
cycle, or fixed. There are two options that pulse mode can be configured to:
Pulse Output (user defines a fixed pulse width)
Frequency Output (pulse width automatically set to 50% duty cycle)
To use pulse width settings, pulse mode must be set to pulse output.
5.2.3
Totalizer
The totalizer provides the total amount of fluid that has passed through the meter. There are
three available totalizers:
Net total - increments with forward flow and decrements with reverse flow (reverse
flow must be enabled). Can be reset to zero using the net total reset function.
Gross/forward total - will only increment with forward flow
Reverse total - will only increment with reverse flow if reverse flow is enabled
93
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
The maximum value for the totalizers is based on 4,294,967,296 (232) feet or corresponding
unit equivalent. If a totalizer reaches this value, it will automatically reset to zero and then
continue counting.
The gross/forward and reverse totalizers can be reset by manually changing the line size.
Totalizer units
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Totalizer, Totalizer Units
1,4,2,5,1
2,2,2,3,5
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
Totalizer units is used to configure the units in which the totalized value will be displayed. These
units are independent of the flow units. Totalizer units are updated to match the flow units
whenever the flow units are written.
Totalizer display
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Totalizer Setup, Total Display
1,4,3,3
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
2,2,1,5,3
The totalizer screen can be configured to display the net and gross totals or the forward and
reverse totals.
Note: Gross and forward totals are the same value.
Start totalizer
LOI menu path
On totalizer screen, press “E”
1,4,2,5,5
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
2,2,2,3,4
Start totalizer starts the totalizer counting from its current value.
Stop totalizer
LOI menu path
On totalizer screen, press “E”
1,4,2,5,6
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
2,2,2,3,4
Stop totalizer interrupts the totalizer count until it is restarted again. This feature is often used
during pipe cleaning or other maintenance operations.
Reset totalizer
LOI menu path
On totalizer screen, press right arrow (totalizer must be stopped)
1,4,2,5,7
2,2,2,3,4
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
Reset totalizer resets the net totalizer value to zero. The totalizer must be stopped before
resetting.
94
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
Note
The totalizer value is stored in the non-volatile memory of the electronics every three seconds. If
power to the transmitter is interrupted, the totalizer value will start at the last saved value when
power is reapplied.
5.2.4
Discrete input/output
This configuration option is only available if the auxiliary output suite (option code AX) was
ordered. The auxiliary output suite provides two channels for control. The discrete input can
provide positive zero return (PZR) and net totalizer reset. The discrete output control function
can be configured to drive an external signal to indicate zero flow, reverse flow, empty pipe,
diagnostic status, flow limit, or transmitter status. A complete list and description of the
available auxiliary functions is provided below.
Discrete input options (Channel 1 only)
PZR (Positive Zero Return). When conditions are met to activate the input, the
transmitter will force the output to zero flow.
Net Total Reset - When conditions are met to activate the input, the transmitter will
reset the net total value to zero.
Discrete output options
Reverse Flow - The output will activate when the transmitter detects a reverse flow
condition.
Zero Flow - The output will activate when a no flow condition is detected.
Transmitter Fault - The output will activate when a transmitter fault condition is
detected.
Empty Pipe - The output will activate when the transmitter detects an empty pipe
condition.
Flow Limit 1 - The output will activate when the transmitter measures a flow rate that
meets the conditions established for the flow limit 1 alert.
Flow Limit 2 - The output will activate when the transmitter measures a flow rate that
meets the conditions established for the flow limit 2 alert.
Diagnostic Status Alert - The output will activate when the transmitter detects a
condition that meets the configured criteria of the diagnostic status alert.
Total Limit - The output will activate when the transmitter net total value meets the
conditions established for the total limit alert.
Channel 1
Channel 1 can be configured as either a discrete input (DI) or as a discrete output (DO).
95
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
DI/O 1 control
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, DI/O 1, DI/O 1 Control
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,3,1,1
2,2,4,1,1
This parameter configures the auxiliary output channel 1. It controls whether channel 1 will be a
discrete input or discrete output on terminals 5(-) and 6(+). Note that the transmitter must have
been ordered with the auxiliary output suite (option code AX) to have access to this
functionality.
Discrete input 1
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, DI/O 1, DI 1
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,3,1,1,3
2,2,4,1,2
This parameter displays the configuration for channel 1 when used as a discrete input. Refer to
the list above for available discrete input functions.
Discrete output 1
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, DI/O 1, DO 1
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,3,1,2,4
2,2,4,1,3
This parameter displays the configuration for channel 1 when used as a discrete output. Refer to
the list above for available discrete output functions.
Channel 2
Channel 2 is available as discrete output only.
Discrete output 2
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, DO 2
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,3,2
2,2,4,2
This parameter displays the configuration for channel 2. Refer to the list above for available
discrete output functions.
96
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
Flow limit (1 and 2)
LOI menu path
Flow 1: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 1
Flow 2: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 2
Flow 1: 1,4,2,3,3 Flow 2: 1,4,2,3,4
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
Flow 1: 2,2,4,3
Flow 2: 2,2,4,4
There are two configurable flow limits. Configure the parameters that will determine the criteria
for activation of a HART alert if the measured flow rate falls within a set of configured criteria.
This functionality can be used for operating simple batching operations or generating alerts
when certain flow conditions are met. This parameter can be configured as a discrete output if
the transmitter was ordered with the auxiliary output suite (option code AX) and the outputs
are enabled. If a discrete output is configured for flow limit, the discrete output will activate
Control
LOI menu path
Flow 1: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 1, Control 1
Flow 2: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 2, Control 2
Flow 1: 1,4,2,3,3,1 Flow 2: 1,4,2,3,4,1
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
Flow 1: 2,2,4,3,4
Flow 2: 2,2,4,4,4
This parameter turns the flow limit HART alert ON or OFF.
ON - The transmitter will generate a HART alert when the defined conditions are met. If a
discrete output is configured for flow limit, the discrete output will activate when the conditions
for mode are met.
OFF - The transmitter will not generate a HART alert for the flow limit.
Mode
LOI menu path
Flow 1: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 1, Mode 1
Flow 2: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 2, Mode 2
Flow 1: 1,4,2,3,3,2 Flow 2: 1,4,2,3,4,2
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
Flow 1: 2,2,4,3,3
Flow 2: 2,2,4,4,3
The mode parameter sets the conditions under which the flow limit HART alert will activate.
High and low limits exist for each channel and can be configured independently.
> High limit - The HART alert will activate when the measured flow rate exceeds the high limit
set point.
< Low limit - The HART alert will activate when the measured flow rate falls below the low limit
set point.
In range - The HART alert will activate when the measured flow rate is between the high limit
and low limit set points.
Out of range - The HART alert will activate when the measured flow rate exceeds the high limit
set point or falls below the low limit set point.
97
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
High limit
LOI menu path
Flow 1: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 1, High Limit 1
Flow 2: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 2, High Limit 2
Flow 1: 1,4,2,3,3,3 Flow 2: 1,4,2,3,4,3
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
Flow 1: 2,2,4,3,1
Flow 2: 2,2,4,4,1
Set the flow rate value that corresponds to the high limit set point for the flow limit alert.
Low limit
LOI menu path
Flow 1: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 1, Low Limit 1
Flow 2: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 2, Low Limit 2
Flow 1: 1,4,2,3,3,4 Flow 2: 1,4,2,3,4,4
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
Flow 1: 2,2,4,3,2
Flow 2: 2,2,4,4,2
Set the flow rate value that corresponds to the low limit set point for the flow limit alert.
Flow limit hysteresis
LOI menu path
Flow 1: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 1, Hysteresis
Flow 2: Detailed Setup, Output Config, DI/DO Config, Flow Limit 2, Hysteresis
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
Flow 1: 1,4,2,3,3,5 Flow 2: 1,4,2,3,4,5
2,2,4,6
Set the hysteresis band for the flow limit to determine how quickly the transmitter comes out of
alert status. The hysteresis value is used for both flow limit 1 and flow limit 2. Changing this
parameter under the configuration parameters for one channel will cause it to also change in the
other channel.
Total limit
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Totalizer, Total Limit
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,3,5
2,2,4,5
Configure the parameters that will determine the criteria for activating a HART alert if the
measured net total falls within a set of configured criteria. This functionality can be used for
operating simple batching operations or generating alerts when certain localized values are
met. This parameter can be configured as a discrete output if the transmitter was ordered with
auxiliary outputs enabled (option code AX). If a digital output is configured for total limit, the
digital output will activate when the conditions for total mode are met.
98
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
Total control
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Totalizer, Total Limit, Total Control
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,3,5,1
2,2,4,5,4
This parameter turns the total limit HART alert ON or OFF.
ON - The transmitter will generate a HART alert when the defined conditions are met.
OFF - The transmitter will not generate a HART alert for the total limit.
Total mode
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Totalizer, Total Limit, Total Mode
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,3,5,2
2,2,4,5,3
The total mode parameter sets the conditions under which the total limit HART alert will
activate. High and low limits exist for each channel and can be configured independently.
> High limit - The HART alert will activate when the totalizer value exceeds the high limit set
point.
< Low limit - The HART alert will activate when the totalizer value falls below the low limit set
point.
In range - The HART alert will activate when the totalizer value is between the high limit and low
limit set points.
Out of range - The HART alert will activate when the totalizer value exceeds the high limit set
point or falls below the low limit set point.
Total high limit
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Totalizer, Total Limit, Tot Hi Limit
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,3,5,3
2,2,4,5,1
Set the net total value that corresponds to the high limit set point for the total high limit alert.
Total low limit
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Totalizer, Total Limit, Tot Low Limit
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,3,5,4
2,2,4,5,2
Set the net total value that corresponds to the low limit set point for the total low limit alert.
99
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
Total limit hysteresis
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Totalizer, Total Limit, Hysteresis
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,3,5,5
2,2,4,7
Set the hysteresis band for the total limit to determine how quickly the transmitter comes out of
alert status.
Diagnostic status alert
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Totalizer, Diagnostic Status Alert
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,3,6
2,2,4,8
The diagnostic status alert is used to turn on or off the diagnostics that will cause this alert to
activate.
ON - The diagnostic status alert will activate when a transmitter detects a diagnostic designated
as ON.
OFF - The diagnostic status alert will not activate when diagnostics designated as OFF are
detected.
Alerts for the following diagnostics can be turned ON or OFF:
Electronics Failure
Coil Open Circuit
Empty Pipe
Reverse Flow
Ground/Wiring Fault
High Process Noise
Electronics Temperature Out of Range
Electrode Coat Limit 1
Electrode Coat Limit 2
Continuous Meter Verification
5.3
Configure HART
The 8732EM has four HART variables available as outputs. The variables can be configured for
dynamic readings including flow, total, and diagnostic values. The HART output can also be
configured for burst mode or multi-drop communication if required.
100
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
5.3.1
Variable mapping
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Hart, Variable Map
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,7,1
2,2,3,2
Variable mapping allows configuration of the variables that are mapped to the secondary,
tertiary and quaternary variables. The primary variable is fixed to output flow and cannot be
configured.
Primary variable (PV)
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Hart, Variable Map, PV
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,7,1,1
2,2,3,2,1
The primary variable is configured for flow. This variable is fixed and cannot be configured. The
primary variable is tied to the analog output.
Secondary variable (SV)
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Hart, Variable Map, SV
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,7,1,2
2,2,3,2,2
The secondary variable maps the second variable of the transmitter. This variable is a HART only
variable and can be read from the HART signal with a HART enabled input card, or can be burst
for use with a HART Tri-Loop to convert the HART signal to an analog output. Options available
Tertiary variable (TV)
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Hart, Variable Map, TV
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,7,1,3
2,2,3,2,3
The tertiary variable maps the third variable of the transmitter. This variable is a HART only
variable and can be read from the HART signal with a HART enabled input card, or can be burst
for use with a HART Tri-Loop to convert the HART signal to an analog output. Options available
101
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
Quaternary variable (QV)
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Hart, Variable Map, QV
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,7,1,4
2,2,3,2,4
The quaternary variable maps the fourth variable of the transmitter. This variable is a HART only
variable and can be read from the HART signal with a HART enabled input card, or can be burst
for use with a HART Tri-Loop™ to convert the HART signal to an analog output. Options available
Table 5-4. Available Variables
Pulse Output
Empty Pipe Value
Gross Total – TV Default
Net Total – SV Default
Reverse Total – QV Default
Electronics Temp
Transmitter Velocity Deviation
Electrode Coating Value
Electrode Resistance Value
Coil Resistance Value
Line Noise Value
Sensor Calibration Deviation Value
mA Loop Deviation Value
5 Hz Signal to Noise Value
37 Hz Signal to Noise Value
5.3.2
Poll address
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Hart Output, Poll Address
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,7,2
2,2,3,1,1
Poll address enables the poll address to be set for use in a multi-drop configuration. The poll
address is used to identify each meter on the multi-drop line. Follow the on-screen instructions
to set the poll address at a number from 1 to 15. To set or change the flowmeter address,
establish communication with the selected 8732EM in the loop.
Note
The 8732EM poll address is set to zero at the factory, allowing standard operation in a
point-to-point manner with a 4-20 mA output signal. To activate multi-drop communication,
the transmitter poll address must be changed to a number between 1 and 15. This change
deactivates the analog output, sets the output value to 4 mA, and disables the failure mode
alarm signal.
102
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
5.3.3
Burst mode
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, HART, Burst Mode
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,7,5
2,2,3,1,2
The 8732EM includes a burst mode function that can be enabled to broadcast the primary
variable or all dynamic variables approximately three to four times per second. Burst mode is a
specialized function used in very specific applications. The burst mode function enables you to
select the variables that are broadcast while in the burst mode.
Burst mode enables you to set the burst mode as OFF or ON:
OFF - Turns burst mode off; no data are broadcast over the loop
ON - Turns burst mode on; data selected under burst option are broadcast over the loop
Additional command options may appear that are reserved and do not apply to the 8732EM.
Burst option (burst command)
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, HART, Burst Command
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,7,6
2,2,3,1,3
Burst option enables you to select the variable(s) that is broadcast during the transmitter burst.
Choose one of the following options:
1; PV; Primary Variable - Selects the primary variable
2; % range/current; Percent of Range and Loop Current - Selects the variable as
percent of range and analog output
3; Process vars/crnt; All Variables and Loop Current - Selects all variables and analog
output
110; Dynamic vars; Dynamic Variables - Burst all dynamic variables in the transmitter
Request preambles
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, HART, Req Preams
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,7,3
N/A
Request preambles is the number of preambles required by the 8732EM for HART communica-
tions.
103
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
Response preambles
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, HART, Resp Preams
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,2,7,4
N/A
Response preambles is the number of preambles sent by the 8732EM in response to any host
request.
5.3.4
Configure LOI
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, LOI Config
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,3
2,2,1,5
The LOI configuration contains functionality to configure the display of the transmitter.
Flow display
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, LOI Config, Flow Display
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,3,2
2,2,1,5,2
Use flow display to configure the parameters that will appear on the LOI flowrate screen. The
flowrate screen displays two lines of information. Choose one of the following options:
Flowrate and % of Span
% of Span and Net Total
Flowrate and Net Total
% of Span and Gross Total
Flowrate and Gross Total
Totalizer display
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, LOI Config, Total Display
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,3,3
2,2,1,5,3
Use totalizer display to configure the parameters that will appear on the LOI totalizer screen. The
totalizer screen has two lines of information. Choose one of the following options:
Forward Total and Reverse Total
Net Total and Gross Total
104
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
Language
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, LOI Config, Language
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,3,1
2,2,1,5,1
Use language to configure the display language shown on the LOI. Choose one of the following
options:
English
Spanish
Portuguese
German
French
LOI error mask
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, LOI Config, LOI Err Mask
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
N/A
N/A
Use LOI error mask to turn off the analog output power error message (AO No Power). This may
be desired if the analog output is not being used.
Display auto lock
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, LOI Config, Disp Auto Lock
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,3,4
2,2,1,5,4
Use display auto lock to configure the LOI to automatically lock the LOI after a set period of time.
Choose one of the following options:
OFF
1 Minute
10 Minutes (default)
105
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
5.4
Additional parameters
The following parameters may be required for detailed configuration settings based on your
application.
5.4.1
Coil drive frequency
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, More Params, Coil Frequency
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,3,1
2,2,8,3
Use coil drive frequency to change the pulse rate of the coils. Choose one of the following
options:
5 Hz - The standard coil drive frequency is 5 Hz, which is sufficient for nearly all
applications.
37 Hz - If the process fluid causes a noisy or unstable output, increase the coil drive
frequency to 37.5 Hz. If the 37 Hz mode is selected, perform the auto zero function for
optimum performance.
5.4.2
Process density
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, More Params, Proc Density
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,3,1
2,2,8,2
Use the process density value to convert from a volumetric flow rate to a mass flow rate using
the following equation:
Qm = Qv x p
Where:
Qm is the mass flow rate
Qv is the volumetric flow rate, and
p is the fluid density
5.4.3
Reverse flow
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Output Config, Reverse Flow
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,3,1
2,2,5,1,5
Use reverse flow to enable or disable the transmitter's ability to read flow in the opposite
process has bi-directional flow, or when either the electrode wires or the coil wires are reversed
reverse direction.
106
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
5.4.4
Low flow cutoff
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Sig Processing, Low Flow Cutoff
1,4,4,4
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
2,2,8,5,2
Low flow cutoff allows the user to set a low flow limit to be specified. The analog output signal is
driven to 4mA for flow rates below the set point. The low flow cutoff units are the same as the PV
units and cannot be changed. The low flow cutoff value applies to both forward and reverse
flows.
5.4.5
5.4.6
PV damping
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Sig Processing, PV Damping
1,4,4,5
2,2,8,1
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
Primary variable damping allows selection of a response time, in seconds, to a step change in
flow rate. It is most often used to smooth fluctuations in output.
Signal processing
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Sig Processing
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,3,1
2,2,8,6
The 8732EM contains several advanced functions that can be used to stabilize erratic outputs
caused by process noise. The signal processing menu contains this functionality.
If the 37 Hz coil drive mode has been set, and the output is still unstable, the damping and signal
processing function should be used. It is important to set the coil drive mode to 37 Hz first, so
the loop response time is not increased.
The 8732EM provides for a very easy and straightforward start-up, and also incorporates the
capability to deal with difficult applications that have previously manifested themselves in a
noisy output signal. In addition to selecting a higher coil drive frequency (37 Hz vs. 5 Hz) to
isolate the flow signal from the process noise, the 8732EM microprocessor can actually
scrutinize each input based on three user-defined parameters to reject the noise specific to the
application.
Operating mode
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Sig Processing, Operating Mode
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,3,1
2,2,8,5,1
The operating mode function can be set to normal mode or filter mode. If set to normal mode,
and the signal is noisy and provides an unstable flow reading, switch to filter mode. Filter mode
automatically uses 37 Hz coil drive frequency and activates signal processing at the factory set
107
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
default values. When using filter mode, perform an auto zero with no flow and a full sensor.
Either of the parameters (coil drive mode or signal processing) may still be changed individually.
Turning signal processing off or changing the coil drive frequency to 5 Hz will automatically
change the operating mode from filter mode to normal mode.
Signal processing control
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Sig Processing, SP Control
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,3,1
2,2,8,6,1
DSP can be turned on or off. When on is selected, the 8732EM output is derived using a running
average of the individual flow inputs. DSP is a software algorithm that examines the quality of
the electrode signal against user-specified tolerances. This average is updated at the rate of 10
samples per second with a coil drive frequency of 5 Hz, and 75 samples per second with a coil
drive frequency of 37Hz. The three parameters that make up signal processing (number of
samples, percent limit, and time limit) are described below.
Number of samples
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Sig Processing, SP Control, Samples:
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,3,1
2,2,8,6,2
The number of samples sets the amount of time that inputs are collected and used to calculate
the average value. Each second is divided into tenths with the number of samples equaling the
number of increments used to calculate the average. This parameter can be configured for an
integer value between 0 and 125. The default value is 90 samples.
Percent rate
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Sig Processing, SP Control, % Rate:
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,3,1
2,2,8,6,3
This parameter will set the tolerance band on either side of the running average, referring to
percent deviation from the average flow rate. Values within the limit are accepted while values
outside the limit are scrutinized to determine if they are a noise spike or an actual flow change.
This parameter can be configured for an integer value between 0 and 100 percent. The default
value is 2 percent.
Time limit
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Sig Processing, SP Control, Time Limit:
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,3,1
2,2,8,6,4
The time limit parameter forces the output and running average values to the new value of an
actual flow rate change that is outside the percent limit boundaries. It thereby limits response
time to flow changes to the time limit value rather than the length of the running average.
108
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
For example, if the number of samples selected is 100, then the response time of the system is
10 seconds. In some cases this may be unacceptable. By setting the time limit, you can force the
8732EM to clear the value of the running average and re-establish the output and average at the
new flow rate once the time limit has elapsed. This parameter limits the response time added to
the loop. A suggested time limit value of two seconds is a good starting point for most
applicable process fluids. This parameter can be configured between 0 and 256 seconds. The
default value is 2 seconds.
5.5
Configure special units
Special units are used when the application requires units that are not included in the flow units
5.5.1
Base volume unit
LOI menu path
Basic Setup, Flow Units, Special Units, Base Vol Units
1,3,2,2,2
2,2,1,6
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
Base volume unit is the unit from which the conversion is being made. Set this variable to the
appropriate option.
5.5.2
5.5.3
Conversion factor
LOI menu path
Basic Setup, Flow Units, Special Units, Conv Factor
1,3,2,2,3
2,2,1,6
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
The special units conversion factor is used to convert base units to special units. For a straight
conversion of units from one unit of measure to a different unit of measure, the conversion
factor is the number of base units in the new unit.
For example, if you are converting from gallons to barrels and there are 31 gallons in a barrel,
the conversion factor is 31.
Base time unit
LOI menu path
Basic Setup, Flow Units, Special Units, Base Time Unit
1,3,2,2,4
2,2,1,6
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
Base time unit provides the time unit from which to calculate the special units.
For example, if your special units is a volume per minute, select minutes.
109
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 5: Advanced Configuration Functionality
August 2015
5.5.4
5.5.5
Special volume unit
LOI menu path
Basic Setup, Flow Units, Special Units, Volume Unit
1,3,2,2,1
2,2,1,6
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
Special volume unit enables you to display the volume unit format to which you have converted
the base volume units. For example, if the special units are abc/min, the special volume variable
is abc. The volume units variable is also used in totalizing the special units flow.
Special flow rate unit
LOI menu path
Basic Setup, Flow Units, Special Units, Rate Unit
1,3,2,2,5
2,2,1,6
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
Flow rate unit is a format variable that provides a record of the units to which you are converting.
The Handheld Communicator will display a special units designator as the units format for your
primary variable. The actual special units setting you define will not appear. Four characters are
available to store the new units designation. The 8732EM LOI will display the four character
designation as configured.
Example
To display flow in acre-feet per day, and acre-foot is equal to 43560 cubic feet, the procedure
would be:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set the volume unit to ACFT.
Set the base volume unit to ft3.
Set the conversion factor to 43560.
Set the time base unit to Day.
Set the flow rate unit to AF/D.
110
Advanced Configuration Functionality
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
Section 6
Advanced Diagnostics
Configuration
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 111
Licensing and enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 112
Tunable empty pipe detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 113
Electronics temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 115
Ground/wiring fault detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 115
High process noise detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 116
Coated electrode detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 117
4-20 mA loop verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 119
SMART™ Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 121
Run manual SMART Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 123
Continuous SMART Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 125
SMART Meter Verification test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 126
SMART Meter Verification measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 127
Optimizing the SMART Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 130
Manual Calibration Verification Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 132
6.1
Introduction
Rosemount Magnetic Flowmeters provide device diagnostics that detect and warn of abnormal
situations throughout the life of the meter - from Installation to Maintenance and Meter
Verification. With Rosemount Magnetic Flowmeter diagnostics enabled, plant availability and
throughput can be improved, and costs through simplified installation, maintenance and trou-
bleshooting can be reduced.
Table 6-1. Diagnostics Availability
Diagnostic name
Diagnostic category Product capability
Basic diagnostics
Tunable Empty Pipe
Electronics Temperature
Coil Fault
Process
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
Process
Transmitter Fault
Reverse Flow
Electrode Saturation
Coil Current
Process
Maintenance
Maintenance
Coil Power
Advanced diagnostics
High Process Noise
Grounding and Wiring Fault
Coated Electrode Detection
Commanded Meter Verification
Continuous Meter Verification
4-20 mA Loop Verification
Process
Suite 1 (DA1)
Suite 1 (DA1)
Suite 1 (DA1)
Suite 2 (DA2)
Suite 2 (DA2)
Suite 2 (DA2)
Installation
Process
Meter Health
Meter Health
Installation
111
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
Options for accessing Rosemount Magmeter Diagnostics
Rosemount Magmeter Diagnostics can be accessed through the Local Operator Interface (LOI),
a Field Communicator, and AMS® Device Manager.
Access diagnostics through the LOI for quicker installation, maintenance,
and meter verification
Rosemount Magmeter Diagnostics are available through the LOI to make maintenance of every
magmeter easier.
Access diagnostics through AMS Device Manager
The value of the diagnostics increases significantly when AMS is used. The user will see
simplified screen flow and procedures on how to respond to the diagnostics messages.
6.2
Licensing and enabling
All advanced diagnostics are licensed by ordering option code DA1, DA2, or both. In the event
that a diagnostic option is not ordered, advanced diagnostics can be licensed in the field
through the use of a license key. Each transmitter has a unique license key specific to the
diagnostic option code. A trial license is also available to enable the advanced diagnostics. This
temporary functionality will be automatically disabled after 30-days or when power to the
transmitter is cycled, whichever occurs first. This trial code can be used a maximum of three
times per transmitter. See the detailed procedures below for entering the license key and
enabling the advanced diagnostics. To obtain a permanent or trial license key, contact your local
Rosemount representative.
6.2.1
Licensing the 8732EM diagnostics
For licensing the advanced diagnostics, follow the steps below.
1.
2.
Power up the 8732EM transmitter.
Verify the software version is 5.4.4 software or later.
LOI menu path
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
Detailed Setup, Device Info, Revision Num
1,4,6,10, -- (1)
1,8,2
1. This item is in a list format without numeric labels.
3.
Determine the Device ID.
LOI menu path
Detailed Setup, Device Info, Device ID
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
1,4,6,6
1,8,1,5
4.
Obtain a license key from a local Rosemount representative.
112
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
5.
Enter license key.
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diagnostics, Licensing, License Key, License Key
Traditional Fast Keys 1,2,3,4,2,2
Device dashboard
1,8,5,4
6.
Enable Advanced Diagnostics.
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Diag Controls
Traditional Fast Keys 1,2,3
Device dashboard
2,2,5,1
6.3
Tunable empty pipe detection
The tunable empty pipe detection provides a means of minimizing issues and false readings
when the pipe is empty. This is most important in batching applications where the pipe may run
empty with some regularity. If the pipe is empty, this diagnostic will activate, set the flow rate to
0, and deliver an alert.
Turning empty pipe on/off
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Empty Pipe
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
1,2,1,1
2,2,5,1,1
The tunable empty pipe detection diagnostic can be turned on or off as required by the
application. The empty pipe diagnostic is shipped turned “On” by default.
6.3.1
Tunable empty pipe parameters
The tunable empty pipe diagnostic has one read-only parameter, and two parameters that can
be custom configured to optimize the diagnostic performance.
Empty pipe (EP) value
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Variables, Empty Pipe
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
1,2,2,4,1
2,2,5,3,1
This parameter shows the current empty pipe value. This is a read-only value. This number is a
unit-less number and is calculated based on multiple installation and process variables such as
sensor type, line size, process fluid properties, and wiring. If the empty pipe value exceeds the
empty pipe trigger level for a specified number of updates, then the empty pipe diagnostic alert
will activate.
113
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
Empty pipe (EP) trigger level
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Basic Diagnostics, Empty Pipe, EP Trig Level
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
1,2,2,4,2
2,2,5,3,2
Limits: 3 to 2000
Empty pipe trigger level is the threshold limit that the empty pipe value must exceed before the
empty pipe diagnostic alert activates. The default setting from the factory is 100.
Empty pipe (EP) counts
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Basic Diagnostics, Empty Pipe, EP Counts
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
1,2,2,4,3
2,2,5,3,3
Limits: 2 to 50
Empty pipe counts is the number of consecutive updates that the transmitter must receive
where the empty pipe value exceeds the empty pipe trigger level before the empty pipe
diagnostic alert activates. The default setting from the factory is 5.
6.3.2
Optimizing tunable empty pipe
The tunable empty pipe diagnostic is set at the factory to properly diagnose most applications.
If this diagnostic activates, the following procedure can be followed to optimize the empty pipe
diagnostic for the application.
Example
1.
2.
3.
Record the empty pipe value with a full pipe condition.
Example: Full reading = 0.2
Record the empty pipe value with an empty pipe condition.
Example: Empty reading = 80.0
Set the empty pipe trigger level to a value between the full and empty readings. For
increased sensitivity to empty pipe conditions, set the trigger level to a value closer to
the full pipe value.
Example: Set the trigger level to 25.0
4.
Set the empty pipe counts to a value corresponding to the desired sensitivity level for
the diagnostic. For applications with entrained air or potential air slugs, less sensitivity
may be desired.
Example: Set the counts to 10
114
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
6.4
Electronics temperature
The 8732EM continuously monitors the temperature of the internal electronics. If the measured
electronics temperature exceeds the operating limits of –40 to 140 °F (–40 to 60 °C) the
transmitter will go into alarm and generate an alert.
6.4.1
Turning electronics temperature on/off
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Elect Temp
1,2,1,1, -- (1)
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
2,2,5,1,4
1. This item is in a list format without numeric labels.
The electronics temperature diagnostic can be turned on or off as required by the applica-
tion.The electronics temperature diagnostic will be turned on by default.
6.4.2
Electronics temperature parameters
The electronics temperature diagnostic has one read-only parameter. It does not have any
configurable parameters.
Electronics temperature
LOI menu path
Traditional Fast Keys 1,2,4,2
Device dashboard 2,2,5,7
Diagnostics, Variables, Elect Temp
This parameter shows the current temperature of the electronics. This is a read-only value.
6.5
Ground/wiring fault detection
The transmitter continuously monitors signal amplitudes over a wide range of frequencies. For
the ground/wiring fault detection diagnostic, the transmitter specifically looks at the signal
amplitude at frequencies of 50 Hz and 60 Hz which are the common AC cycle frequencies found
throughout the world. If the amplitude of the signal at either of these frequencies exceeds 5 mV,
that is an indication that there is a ground or wiring issue and that stray electrical signals are
getting into the transmitter. The diagnostic alert will activate indicating that the ground and
wiring of the installation should be carefully reviewed.
The ground/wiring fault detection diagnostic provides a means of verifying installations are
done correctly. If the installation is not wired or grounded properly, this diagnostic will activate
and deliver an alert. This diagnostic can also detect if the grounding is lost over-time due to
corrosion or another root cause.
115
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
6.5.1
Turning ground/wiring fault on/off
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Ground/Wiring
1,2,1,1, -- (1)
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
2,2,5,1,3
1. This item is in a list format without numeric labels.
The ground/wiring fault detection diagnostic can be turned on or off as required by the
application. If the advanced diagnostics suite 1 (DA1 Option) was ordered, then the
ground/wiring fault detection diagnostic will be turned on. If DA1 was not ordered or licensed,
this diagnostic is not available.
6.5.2
Ground/wiring fault parameters
The ground/wiring fault detection diagnostic has one read-only parameter. It does not have any
configurable parameters.
Line noise
LOI menu path
Traditional Fast Keys 1,2,4,3
Device dashboard
2,2,5,4,1
Diagnostics, Variables, Line Noise
The line noise parameter shows the amplitude of the line noise. This is a read-only value. This
number is a measure of the signal strength at 50/60 Hz. If the line noise value exceeds 5 mV,
then the ground/wiring fault diagnostic alert will activate.
6.6
High process noise detection
The high process noise diagnostic detects if there is a process condition causing an unstable or
noisy reading that is not an actual flow variation. A common cause of high process noise is slurry
flow, like pulp stock or mining slurries. Other conditions that cause this diagnostic to activate
are high levels of chemical reaction or entrained gas in the liquid. If unusual noise or flow
variation is seen, this diagnostic will activate and deliver an alert. If this situation exists and is left
without remedy, it will add additional uncertainty and noise to the flow reading.
6.6.1
Turning high process noise on/off
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Process Noise
1,2,1,1, -- (1)
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
2,2,5,1,2
1. This item is in a list format without numeric labels.
The high process noise diagnostic can be turned on or off as required by the application. If the
advanced diagnostics suite 1 (DA1 Option) was ordered, then the high process noise diagnostic
will be turned on. If DA1 was not ordered or licensed, this diagnostic is not available.
116
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
6.6.2
High process noise parameters
The high process noise diagnostic has two read-only parameters. It does not have any
configurable parameters. This diagnostic requires that flow be present in the pipe and the
velocity be greater than1 ft/s (0.3 m/s).
5 Hz signal to noise ratio (SNR)
LOI menu path
Traditional Fast Keys 1,2,4,4
Device dashboard
2,2,5,5,1
Diagnostics, Variables, 5Hz SNR
This parameter shows the value of the signal to noise ratio at the coil drive frequency of 5 Hz.
This is a read-only value. This number is a measure of the signal strength at 5 Hz relative to the
amount of process noise. If the transmitter is operating in 5 Hz mode, and the signal to noise
ratio remains below 25 for one minute, then the high process noise diagnostic alert will activate.
37 Hz signal to noise ratio (SNR)
LOI menu path
Traditional Fast Keys 1,2,4,5
Device dashboard
2,2,5,5,2
Diagnostics, Variables, 37Hz SNR
This parameter shows the current value of the signal to noise ratio at the coil drive frequency of
37 Hz. This is a read-only value. This number is a measure of the signal strength at 37 Hz relative
to the amount of process noise. If the transmitter is operating in 37 Hz mode, and the signal to
noise ratio remains below 25 for one minute, then the high process noise diagnostic alert will
activate.
6.7
Coated electrode detection
The coated electrode detection diagnostic provides a means of monitoring insulating coating
buildup on the measurement electrodes. If coating is not detected, buildup over time can lead
to a compromised flow measurement. This diagnostic can detect if the electrode is coated and if
the amount of coating is affecting the flow measurement. There are two levels of electrode
coating.
Limit 1 indicates when coating is starting to occur, but has not compromised the flow
measurement.
Limit 2 indicates when coating is affecting the flow measurement and the meter should be
serviced immediately.
6.7.1
Turning coated electrode detection on/off
LOI menu path
Traditional Fast Keys 1,2,3,1
Device dashboard
2,2,5,1,5
Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Elec Coating
The coated electrode detection diagnostic can be turned on or off as required by the
application. If the advanced diagnostics suite 1 (DA1 option) was ordered, then the coated
117
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
electrode detection diagnostic will be turned on. If DA1 was not ordered or licensed, this
diagnostic is not available.
6.7.2
Coated electrode parameters
The coated electrode detection diagnostic has four parameters. Two are read-only and two are
configurable parameters. The electrode coating parameters need to be initially monitored to
accurately set the electrode coating limit levels for each application.
Electrode coating (EC) value
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Elec Coating, EC Current Val
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
1,2,3,1,1
2,2,5,6,1
The electrode coating value reads the value of the coated electrode detection diagnostic.
Electrode coating (EC) level 1 limit
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Elec Coat, EC Limit 1
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
1,2,3,1,2
2,2,5,6,2
Set the criteria for the electrode coating limit 1 which indicates when coating is starting to
occur, but has not compromised the flow measurement. The default value for this parameter is
1000 k Ohm.
Electrode coating (EC) level 2 limit
LOI menu path
Traditional Fast Keys 1,2,3,1,3
Device dashboard 2,2,5,6,3
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Elec Coat, EC Limit 2
Set the criteria for the electrode coating limit 2 which indicates when coating is affecting the
flow measurement and the meter should be serviced immediately. The default value for this
parameter is 2000 k Ohm.
Maximum electrode coating (EC)
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Elec Coat, EC Max Value
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
1,2,3,1,4
2,2,5,6,4
The maximum electrode coating value reads the maximum value of the coated electrode
detection diagnostic since the last maximum value reset.
118
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
Clear maximum electrode value
LOI menu path
Traditional Fast Keys 1,2,3,1,5
Device dashboard
2,2,5,6,5
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Elec Coat, Reset Max Val
Use this method to reset the maximum electrode coating value.
6.8
4-20 mA loop verification
The 4-20 mA loop verification diagnostic provides a means of verifying the analog output loop is
functioning properly. This is a manually initiated diagnostic test. This diagnostic checks the
integrity of the analog loop and provides a health status of the circuit. If the verification does not
pass, this will be highlighted in the results given at the end of the check.
The 4-20 mA loop verification diagnostic is useful for testing the analog output when errors are
suspected. The diagnostic tests the analog loop at five different mA output levels:
4 mA
12 mA
20 mA
Low alarm level
High alarm level
6.8.1
6.8.2
Initiating 4-20 mA loop verification
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, 4-20mA Verify, 4-20mA Verify
Traditional Fast Keys 1,2,3,3,1
Device dashboard
3,4,3,1
The 4-20 mA loop verification diagnostic can be initiated as required by the application. If the
advanced diagnostics suite 2 (DA2 Option) was ordered, then the 4-20 mA loop verification
diagnostic will be available. If DA2 was not ordered or licensed, this diagnostic is not available.
4-20 mA loop verification parameters
The 4-20 mA loop verification diagnostic has five read-only parameters plus an overall test
result. It does not have any configurable parameters.
4-20 mA loop verification test result
LOI menu path
Traditional Fast Keys 1,2,3,3,2
Device dashboard 3,4,3
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, 4-20mA Verify, View Results
Shows the results of the 4-20 mA loop verification test as either passed or failed.
119
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
4 mA measurement
LOI menu path
N/A
Traditional Fast Keys N/A
Device dashboard
3,4,3,2
Shows the measured value of the 4 mA loop verification test.
12 mA measurement
LOI menu path
N/A
Traditional Fast Keys N/A
Device dashboard
3,4,3,3
Shows the measured value of the 12 mA loop verification test.
20 mA measurement
LOI menu path
N/A
Traditional Fast Keys N/A
Device dashboard
3,4,3,4
Shows the measured value of the 20 mA loop verification test.
Low alarm measurement
LOI menu path
N/A
Traditional Fast Keys N/A
Device dashboard
3,4,3,5
Shows the measured value of the low alarm verification test.
High alarm measurement
LOI menu path
N/A
Traditional Fast Keys N/A
Device dashboard
3,4,3,6
Shows the measured value of the high alarm verification test.
6.9
SMART™ Meter Verification
The SMART Meter Verification diagnostic provides a means of verifying the flowmeter is within
calibration without removing the sensor from the process. This diagnostic test provides a review
of the transmitter and sensor's critical parameters as a means to document verification of
calibration. The results of this diagnostic provide the deviation amount from expected values
and a pass/fail summary against user-defined criteria for the application and conditions. The
SMART Meter Verification diagnostic can be configured to run continuously in the background
during normal operation, or it can be manually initiated as required by the application.
120
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
6.9.1
Sensor baseline (signature) parameters
The SMART Meter Verification diagnostic functions by taking a baseline sensor signature and
then comparing measurements taken during the verification test to these baseline results.
The sensor signature describes the magnetic behavior of the sensor. Based on Faraday's law, the
induced voltage measured on the electrodes is proportional to the magnetic field strength.
Thus, any changes in the magnetic field will result in a calibration shift of the sensor. Having the
transmitter take an initial sensor signature when first installed will provide the baseline for the
verification tests that are done in the future. There are three specific measurements that are
stored in the transmitter's non-volatile memory that are used when performing the calibration
verification.
Coil circuit resistance
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Sensr Baseline, Values, Coil Resist
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
1,2,3,2,3,1,1
2,2,6,1,1
The coil circuit resistance is a measurement of the coil circuit health. This value is used as a
baseline to determine if the coil circuit is still operating correctly.
Coil inductance (signature)
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Sensr Baseline, Values, Inductnce
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
1,2,3,2,3,1,2
2,2,6,1,2
The coil inductance is a measurement of the magnetic field strength. This value is used as a
baseline to determine if a sensor calibration shift has occurred.
Electrode circuit resistance
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Sensr Baseline, Values, Electrode
Res
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
1,2,3,2,3,1,3
2,2,6,1,3
The electrode circuit resistance is a measurement of the electrode circuit health. This value is
used as a baseline to determine if the electrode circuit is still operating correctly.
6.9.2
Establishing the sensor baseline (signature)
The first step in running the SMART Meter Verification test is establishing the reference
signature that the test will use as the baseline for comparison. This is accomplished by having
the transmitter take a signature of the sensor.
121
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
Reset baseline (re-signature meter)
LOI menu path
Traditional Fast Keys 1,2,3,2,3,2
Device dashboard
2,2,6,1,4
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Sensr Baseline, Reset Baseline
Having the transmitter take an initial sensor signature when first installed will provide the
baseline for the verification tests that are done in the future. The sensor signature should be
taken during the start-up process when the transmitter is first connected to the sensor, with a
full line, and ideally with no flow in the line. Running the sensor signature procedure when there
is flow in the line is permissible, but this may introduce some noise into the electrode circuit
resistance measurement. If an empty pipe condition exists, then the sensor signature should
only be run for the coils.
Once the sensor signature process is complete, the measurements taken during this procedure
are stored in non-volatile memory to prevent loss in the event of a power interruption to the
meter. This initial sensor signature is required for both manual and continuous SMART Meter
Verification.
Recall values (recall last saved)
LOI menu path
Traditional Fast Keys 1,2,3,2,3,3
Device dashboard 2,2,6,1,5
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Sensr Baseline, Recall Values
In the event that the sensor baseline was reset accidentally or incorrectly, this function will
restore the previously saved sensor baseline values.
6.9.3
SMART Meter Verification test criteria
The Smart Meter Verification diagnostic provides the ability to customize the test criteria to
which the verification must be tested. The test criteria can be set for each of the flow conditions
discussed above.
No flow limit
LOI menu path
Traditional Fast Keys 1,2,3,2,4,1
Device dashboard
2,2,6,3,1
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Test Criteria, No Flow
Set the test criteria for the no flow condition. The factory default for this value is set to five
percent with limits configurable between one and ten percent. This parameter applies to
manually initiated test only.
122
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
Flowing full limit
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Test Criteria, Flowing Full
Traditional Fast Keys 1,2,3,2,4,2
Device dashboard
2,2,6,3,2
Set the test criteria for the flowing, full condition. The factory default for this value is set to five
percent with limits configurable between one and ten percent. This parameter applies to
manually initiated tests only.
Empty pipe limit
LOI menu path
Traditional Fast Keys 1,2,3,2,4,3
Device dashboard 2,2,6,3,3
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Test Criteria, Empty Pipe
Set the test criteria for the empty pipe condition. The factory default for this value is set to five
percent with limits configurable between one and ten percent. This parameter applies to
manually initiated test only.
Continuous limit
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Test Criteria, Continual
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
1,2,3,2,4,4
2,2,6,4,1
Set the test criteria for the continuous SMART Meter Verification diagnostic. The factory default
for this value is set to five percent with limits configurable between two and ten percent. If the
tolerance band is set too tightly, under empty pipe conditions or noisy flowing conditions, a
false failure of the transmitter test may occur.
6.10
Run manual SMART Meter Verification
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Run Meter Ver
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
1,2,3,2,1
1,6
The SMART Meter Verification diagnostic will be available if the advanced diagnostic suite (DA2)
was ordered. If DA2 was not ordered or licensed, this diagnostic will not be available. This
method will initiate the manual meter verification test.
123
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
6.10.1
Test conditions
SMART Meter Verification can be initiated under three possible test conditions. This parameter
is set at the time that the sensor baseline or SMART Meter Verification test is manually initiated.
No flow
Run the SMART Meter Verification test with a full pipe and no flow in the line. Running the
SMART Meter Verification test under this condition provides the most accurate results and the
best indication of magnetic flowmeter health.
Flowing full
Run the SMART Meter Verification test with a full pipe and flow in the line. Running the SMART
Meter Verification test under this condition provides the ability to verify the magnetic
flowmeter health without shutting down the process flow in applications when a shutdown is
not possible. Running the diagnostic under flowing conditions can cause a false test failure if
there is significant process noise present.
Empty pipe
Run the SMART Meter Verification test with an empty pipe. Running the SMART Meter
Verification test under this condition provides the ability to verify the magnetic flowmeter
health with an empty pipe. Running the verification diagnostic under empty pipe conditions will
not check the electrode circuit health.
6.10.2
Test scope
The manually initiated SMART Meter Verification test can be used to verify the entire flowmeter
installation or individual parts such as the transmitter or sensor. This parameter is set at the time
that the SMART Meter Verification test is manually initiated. There are three test scopes from
which to choose.
All
Run the SMART Meter Verification test and verify the entire flowmeter installation. This
parameter results in the diagnostic performing the transmitter calibration verification, sensor
calibration verification, coil health check, and electrode health check. Transmitter calibration
and sensor calibration are verified to the percentage associated with the test condition selected
when the test was initiated. This setting applies to manually initiated tests only.
Transmitter
Run the SMART Meter Verification test on the transmitter only. This results in the verification
test only checking the transmitter calibration to the limits of the test criteria selected when the
verification test was initiated. This setting applies to manually initiated tests only.
Sensor
Run the SMART Meter Verification test on the sensor only. This results in the verification test
checking the sensor calibration to the limits of the test criteria selected when the SMART Meter
Verification test was initiated, verifying the coil circuit health, and the electrode circuit health.
This setting applies to manually initiated tests only.
124
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
6.11
Continuous SMART Meter Verification
LOI menu path
Traditional Fast Keys 1,2,1,3
Device dashboard
2,2,6,4
Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Cont Meter Ver
Continuous SMART Meter Verification can be used to monitor and verify the health of the
flowmeter system. The continuous SMART Meter Verification will not report results until 30
minutes after powering up to ensure the system is stable and to avoid false failures.
6.11.1
Test scope
Continuous SMART Meter Verification can be configured to monitor the sensor coils, electrodes,
transmitter calibration, and analog output. All of these parameters can be individually enabled
or disabled. These parameters apply to continuous SMART Meter Verification only.
Coils
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Cont Meter Ver, Coils
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
1,2,1,3,1
2,2,6,4,2,1
Continuously monitor the sensor coil circuit by enabling this continuous SMART Meter
Verification parameter.
Electrodes
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Cont Meter Ver, Electrodes
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
1,2,1,3,2
2,2,6,4,2,2
Continuously monitor the electrode resistance by enabling this continuous SMART Meter
Verification parameter.
Transmitter
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Cont Meter Ver, Transmitter
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
1,2,1,3,3
2,2,6,4,2,3
Continuously monitor the transmitter calibration by enabling this continuous SMART Meter
Verification parameter.
Analog output
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Cont Meter Ver, Analog Output
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
1,2,1,3,4
2,2,6,4,2,4
Continuously monitor the analog output signal by enabling this continuous SMART Meter
Verification parameter.
125
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
6.12
SMART Meter Verification test results
If the SMART Meter Verification test is manually initiated, the transmitter will make several
measurements to verify the transmitter calibration, sensor calibration, coil circuit health, and
electrode circuits health. The results of these tests can be reviewed and recorded on the Manual
Verification Results" form and enter the test results as you view them. The completed form can
be used to validate that the meter is within the required calibration limits to comply with
governmental regulatory agencies.
Depending on the method used to view the results, they will be displayed in either a menu
structure, as a method, or in the report format. When using the HART® Field Communicator,
each individual parameter can be viewed as a menu item. When using the LOI, the parameters
are viewed as a method using the left arrow key to cycle through the results. In AMS, the
calibration verification report is populated with the necessary data eliminating the need to
When using AMS there are two possible methods that can be used to print the report:
Method one involves using the print functionality within the EDDL screen. This print
functionality essentially prints a screen shot of the report.
Method two involves using the print feature within AMS while on the Maintenance
Service Tools screen. This will result in a printout of all of the maintenance information.
Page one of the report contains the meter verification result data.
The results are displayed in the order found in the table below. Each parameter displays a value
used by the diagnostic to evaluate meter health.
Table 6-2. Manual Smart Meter Verification Test Parameters
Traditional Device Dashboard
LOI menu path
(Diagnostics, Variables, MV Results, Manual Results)
Parameter
Fast keys
Fast keys
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Test Condition
Test Criteria
Test Condition
Test Criteria
MV Results
1,2,3,2,2,1,1
1,2,3,2,2,1,2
1,2,3,2,2,1,3
1,2,3,2,2,1,4
1,2,3,2,2,1,5
1,2,3,2,2,1,6
1,2,3,2,2,1,7
1,2,3,2,2,1,8
1,2,3,2,2,1,9
1,2,3,2,2,1,--(1)
1,2,3,2,2,1,--(1)
3,4,1,5,4,1
3,4,1,3
8714i Test Result
Simulated Velocity
Actual Velocity
3,4,1,5,4,2
3,4,1,5,3,1
3,4,1,5,3,2
3,4,1,5,3,3
3,4,1,5,3,4
3,4,1,5,2,3
3,4,1,5,2,4
3,4,1,5,1,3
3,4,1,5,1,6
Sim Velocity
ActualVelocity
Flow Sim Dev
Xmtr Cal Verify
Sensor Cal Dev
Sensor Cal
Velocity Deviation
Xmtr Cal Test Result
Sensor Cal Deviation
Sensor Cal Test Result
10 Coil Circuit Test Result
Coil Circuit
11 Electrode Circuit Test
Result
Electrode Ckt
1. To get to this value, use the down arrow to scroll through the menu list.
126
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
Table 6-3. Continuous SMART Meter Verification Test Parameters
LOI menu path
Traditional Device Dashboard
Parameter
Fast keys
Fast keys
(Diagnostics, Variables, MV Results, Continual Res,...)
1
2
Continuous Limit
Simulated Velocity
Actual Velocity
Velocity Deviation
Coil Signature
Test Criteria
Sim Velocity
ActualVelocity
Flow Sim Dev
Coil Inductnce
Sensor Cal Dev
Coil Resist
1,2,3,2,2,2,1
1,2,3,2,2,2,2
1,2,3,2,2,2,3
1,2,3,2,2,2,4
1,2,3,2,2,2,5
1,2,3,2,2,2,6
1,2,3,2,2,2,7
1,2,3,2,2,2,8
1,2,3,2,2,2,9
1,2,3,2,2,2,--(1)
1,2,3,2,2,2,--(1)
3,4,2,2
3,2,4,3,1
3,2,4,3,2
3,2,4,3,3
3,2,4,2,2
3,2,4,2,3
3,2,4,2,1
3,2,4,2,4
3,2,4,4,1
3,2,4,4,2
3,2,4,4,3
3
4
5
6
Sensor Cal Deviation
Coil Resistance
Electrode Resistance
mA Expected
7
8
Electrode Res
4-20 mA Expect
4-20 mA Actual
AO FB Dev
9
10
11
mA Actual
mA Deviation
1. To get to this value, use the down arrow to scroll through the menu list.
6.13
SMART Meter Verification measurements
The SMART Meter Verification test will make measurements of the coil resistance, coil signature,
and electrode resistance and compare these values to the values taken during the sensor
signature process to determine the sensor calibration deviation, the coil circuit health, and the
electrode circuit health. In addition, the measurements taken by this test can provide additional
information when troubleshooting the meter.
Coil circuit resistance
Manual: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Measurements, Manual
Measure, Coil Resist
LOI menu path
Continuous: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Measurements,
Continual Meas, Coil Resist
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
Manual: 1,2,3,2,5,1,1
Continuous: 1,2,3,2,5,2,1
Manual: 3,4,1,3,1
Continuous: 3,2,4,2,1
The coil circuit resistance is a measurement of the coil circuit health. This value is compared to
the coil circuit resistance baseline measurement taken during the sensor signature process to
determine coil circuit health. This value can be continuously monitored using continuous
SMART Meter Verification.
127
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
Coil signature
Manual: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Measurements, Manual
Measure, Coil Inductnce
LOI menu path
Continuous: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Measurements,
Continual Meas, Coil Inductnce
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
Manual: 1,2,3,2,5,1,2
Continuous: 1,2,3,2,5,2,2
Manual: 3,4,1,3,2
Continuous: 3,2,4,2,2
The coil signature is a measurement of the magnetic field strength. This value is compared to
the coil signature baseline measurement taken during the sensor signature process to
determine sensor calibration deviation. This value can be continuously monitored using
continuous SMART Meter Verification.
Electrode circuit resistance
Manual: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Measurements, Manual
Measure, Electrode Res
LOI menu path
Continuous: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Measurements,
Continual Meas, Electrode Res
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
Manual: 1,2,3,2,5,1,3
Continuous: 1,2,3,2,5,2,3
Manual: 3,4,1,3,3
Continuous: 3,2,4,2,4
The electrode circuit resistance is a measurement of the electrode circuit health. This value is
compared to the electrode circuit resistance baseline measurement taken during the sensor
signature process to determine electrode circuit health. This value can be continuously
monitored using continuous SMART Meter Verification.
Actual velocity
Manual: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Measurements, Manual
Measure, Actual Velocity
LOI menu path
Continuous: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Measurements,
Continual Meas, Actual Velocity
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
Manual: 1,2,3,2,2,1,5
Continuous: 1,2,3,2,5,2,4
Manual: 3,4,1,5,3,2
Continuous: 3,2,4,3,2
The actual velocity is a measurement of the simulated velocity signal. This value is compared to
the simulated velocity to determine transmitter calibration deviation. This value can be
continuously monitored using continuous SMART Meter Verification.
128
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
Flow simulation deviation
Manual: Diagnostics, Variables, MV Results, Manual Results, Flow Sim Dev
LOI menu path
Continuous: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Measurements,
Continual Meas, Flow Sim Dev
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
Manual: 1,2,3,2,2,1,6
Continuous: 1, 2, 3, 2, 2, 2, 4
Manual: 3,4,1,5,3,3
Continuous: 3,2,4,3,3
The flow simulation deviation is a measurement of the percent difference between the
simulated velocity and the actual measured velocity from the transmitter calibration
verification test. This value can be continuously monitored using continuous SMART Meter
Verification.
4-20 mA expected value
Manual: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, 4-20 mA Verify, View Results
LOI menu path
Continuous: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Measurements,
Continual Meas, 4-20 mA Expect
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
Manual: 1,2,3,3,2
Continuous: 1,2,3,2,5,2,5
Manual: N/A
Continuous: 3,2,4,4,1
The 4-20 mA expected value is the simulated analog signal used for the 4-20 mA meter
verification test. This value is compared to the actual analog signal to determine analog output
deviation. This value can be continuously monitored using continuous SMART Meter
Verification.
4-20 mA actual value
Manual: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, 4-20 mA Verify, View Results
LOI menu path
Continuous: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Measurements,
Continual Meas, 4-20 mA Actual
Traditional Fast Keys
Device dashboard
Manual: 1,2,3,3,2
Continuous: 1,2,3,2,5,2,6
Manual: N/A
Continuous: 3,2,4,4,1
The 4-20 mA actual value is the measured analog signal used for the 4-20 mA meter verification
test. This value is compared to the simulated analog signal to determine analog output
deviation. This value can be continuously monitored using continuous SMART Meter
Verification.
129
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
4-20 mA deviation
Manual: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, 4-20 mA Verify, View Results
Continuous: Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Meter Verify, Measurements,
LOI menu path
Continual Meas, AO FB Dev
Traditional Fast Keys
Manual: 1,2,3,3,2
Continuous: 1,2,3,2,2,2, --(1)
Manual: N/A
Device dashboard
Continuous: 3,2,4,4,1
1. To get to this value, the down arrow must be used to scroll through the menu list
The 4-20 mA deviation is a measurement of the percent difference between the simulated
analog signal and the actual measured analog signal from the analog output verification test.
This value can be continuously monitored using continuous SMART Meter Verification.
6.14
Optimizing the SMART Meter Verification
The SMART Meter Verification diagnostic can be optimized by setting the test criteria to the
desired levels necessary to meet the compliance requirements of the application. The following
examples below will provide some guidance on how to set these levels.
Example
An effluent meter must be certified annually to comply with environmental regulations. This
example regulation requires that the meter be certified to five percent.
Since this is an effluent meter, shutting down the process may not be viable. In this instance the
SMART Meter Verification test will be performed under flowing conditions. Set the test criteria
for flowing, full to five percent to meet the requirements of the governmental agencies.
Example
A pharmaceutical company requires bi-annual verification of meter calibration on a critical feed
line for one of their products. This is an internal standard, and the plant requires a calibration
record be kept on-hand. Meter calibration on this process must meet two percent. The process
is a batch process so it is possible to perform the calibration verification with the line full and
with no flow.
Since the SMART Meter Verification test can be run under no flow conditions, set the test criteria
for no flow to two percent to comply with the necessary plant standards.
Example
A food and beverage company requires an annual calibration of a meter on a product line. The
plant standard calls for the accuracy to be three percent or better. They manufacture this
product in batches, and the measurement cannot be interrupted when a batch is in process.
When the batch is complete, the line goes empty.
Since there is no means of performing the SMART Meter Verification test while there is product
in the line, the test must be performed under empty pipe conditions. The test criteria for empty
pipe should be set to three percent, and it should be noted that the electrode circuit health
cannot be verified.
130
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
6.14.1
Optimizing continuous SMART Meter Verification
Example
For continuous SMART Meter Verification, there is only one test criteria value to configure, and it
will be used for all flow conditions. The factory default is set to five percent to minimize the
potential for false failures under empty pipe conditions. For best results, set the criteria to match
the maximum value of the three test criteria set during manual meter verification (no flow,
flowing full, and empty pipe).
For example, a plant might set the following manual meter verification test criteria: two percent
for no flow, three percent for flowing full, and four percent for empty pipe. In this case, the
maximum test criterion is four percent, so the test criteria for continuous SMART Meter
Verification should be set to four percent. If the tolerance band is set too tightly, under empty
pipe conditions or noisy flowing conditions, a false failure of the transmitter test may occur.
131
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 6: Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
August 2015
Manual Calibration Verification Results
Report parameters
User Name: _____________________________________________ Calibration Conditions: qInternal qExternal
Tag #:__________________________________________________ Test Conditions:
q Flowing q No Flow, Full Pipe q Empty Pipe
Flowmeter information and configuration
Software Tag:
Calibration Number:
Line Size:
PV URV (20 mA scale):____________________________________
PV LRV (4 mA scale):_____________________________________
PV Damping:____________________________________________
Sensor calibration verification results
Transmitter calibration verification results
Simulated Velocity:
Actual Velocity:
Sensor Deviation %:_____________________________________
Sensor Test:
q PASS / q FAIL / q NOT TESTED
Deviation %:
Coil Circuit Test:
q PASS / q FAIL / q NOT TESTED
Transmitter:
Electrode Circuit Test:
q PASS / q FAIL / q NOT TESTED
q PASS / q FAIL / q NOT TESTED
Summary of Calibration Verification results
Verification Results: The result of the flowmeter verification test is: q PASSED / q FAILED
Verification Criteria: This meter was verified to be functioning within _____________ % of deviation from the original test parameters.
Signature:____________________________________________
Date:__________________________________________________
132
Advanced Diagnostics Configuration
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 7: Digital Signal Processing
August 2015
Section 7
Digital Signal Processing
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 133
Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 133
Process noise profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 134
High process noise diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 134
Optimizing flow reading in noisy applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 134
Explanation of signal processing algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 138
7.1
7.2
Introduction
Magmeters are used in applications that can create noisy flow readings. The Rosemount
8732EM has the capability to deal with difficult applications that have previously manifested
themselves in a noisy output signal. In addition to selecting a higher coil drive frequency (37 Hz
vs. 5 Hz) to isolate the flow signal from the process noise, the 8732EM microprocessor has
digital signal processing that is capable of rejecting the noise specific to the application. This
section explains the different types of process noise, provides instructions for optimizing the
flow reading in noisy applications, and provides a detailed description of the digital signal
processing functionality.
Safety messages
Instructions and procedures in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Read the following safety messages before
performing any operation described in this section.
Explosions could result in death or serious injury.
Verify the operating atmosphere of the sensor and transmitter is consistent with the
appropriate hazardous locations certifications.
Do not remove the transmitter cover in explosive atmospheres when the circuit is live.
Before connecting a HART-based communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make
sure the instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or
non-incendive field wiring practices.
Both transmitter covers must be fully engaged to meet explosion-proof requirements.
Failure to follow safe installation and servicing guidelines could result in death or
serious injury.
Installation should be performed by qualified personnel only.
Do not perform any service other than those contained in this manual.
Process leaks may result in death or serious injury.
The electrode compartment may contain line pressure; it must be depressurized
before the cover is removed.
High voltage that may be present on leads could cause electrical shock.
Avoid contact with leads and terminals.
133
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 7: Digital Signal Processing
August 2015
7.3
Process noise profiles
1/f noise
This type of noise has higher amplitudes at lower frequencies, but generally degrades over
increasing frequencies. Potential sources of 1/f noise include chemical mixing and slurry flow
particles rubbing against the electrodes.
Spike noise
This type of noise generally results in a high amplitude signal at specific frequencies which can
vary depending on the source of the noise. Common sources of spike noise include chemical
injections directly upstream of the flowmeter, hydraulic pumps, and slurry flows with low
concentrations of particles in the stream. The particles bounce off of the electrode generating a
“spike” in the electrode signal. An example of this type of flow stream would be a recycle flow in
a paper mill.
White noise
This type of noise results in a high amplitude signal that is relatively constant over the frequency
range. Common sources of white noise include chemical reactions or mixing that occurs as the
fluid passes through the flowmeter and high concentration slurry flows where the particulates
are constantly passing over the electrode head. An example of this type of flow stream would be
a basis weight stream in a paper mill.
7.4
7.5
High process noise diagnostic
The transmitter continuously monitors signal amplitudes over a wide range of frequencies. For
the high process noise diagnostic, the transmitter specifically looks at the signal amplitude at
frequencies of 2.5 Hz, 7.5 Hz, 32.5 Hz, and 42.5 Hz. The transmitter uses the values from 2.5
and 7.5 Hz and calculates an average noise level. This average is compared to the amplitude of
the signal at 5 Hz. If the signal amplitude is not 25 times greater than the noise level, and the coil
drive frequency is set at 5 Hz, the high process noise diagnostic will trip indicating that the flow
signal may be compromised. The transmitter performs the same analysis around the 37.5 Hz
coil drive frequency using the 32.5 Hz and 42.5 Hz values to establish a noise level.
Optimizing flow reading in noisy applications
If the flow reading of the 8732EM is unstable, first check the wiring, grounding, and process
reference associated with the magnetic flowmeter system. Ensure that the following conditions
are met:
Ground straps are attached to the adjacent flange or ground ring
Grounding rings, lining protectors, or a process reference electrode are being used in
lined or non-conductive piping
The causes of unstable transmitter output can usually be traced to extraneous voltages on the
measuring electrodes. This “process noise” can arise from several causes including electro-
chemical reactions between the fluid and the electrode, chemical reactions in the process itself,
134
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 7: Digital Signal Processing
August 2015
free ion activity in the fluid, or some other disturbance of the fluid/electrode capacitive layer. In
such noisy applications, an analysis of the frequency spectrum reveals process noise that
typically becomes significant below 15 Hz.
In some cases, the effects of process noise may be sharply reduced by elevating the coil drive
frequency above the 15 Hz region. The Rosemount 8732EM coil drive mode is selectable
between the standard 5 Hz and the noise-reducing 37 Hz.
7.5.1
Coil drive frequency
LOI menu path
Device Setup, Detailed Setup, Additional Params, Coil Drive Freq
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,1,1
2,2,8,3
This parameter changes the pulse rate of the magnetic coils.
5 Hz
The standard coil drive frequency is 5 Hz, which is sufficient for nearly all applications.
37 Hz
If the process fluid causes a noisy or unstable flow reading, increase the coil drive frequency to
37 Hz. If the 37 Hz mode is selected, perform the auto zero function for optimum performance.
7.5.2
Auto zero
LOI menu path
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
Device Setup, Diagnostics, Trims, Auto Zero
1,2,5,4
2,2,8,4
To ensure optimum accuracy when using 37 Hz coil drive mode, there is an auto zero function
that should be initiated. When using 37 Hz coil drive mode it is important to zero the system for
the specific application and installation.
The auto zero procedure should be performed only under the following conditions:
With the transmitter and sensor installed in their final positions. This procedure is not
applicable on the bench.
With the transmitter in 37 Hz coil drive mode. Never attempt this procedure with the
transmitter in 5 Hz coil drive mode.
With the sensor full of process fluid at zero flow.
These conditions should cause an output equivalent to zero flow.
Set the loop to manual if necessary and begin the auto zero procedure. The transmitter
completes the procedure automatically in about 90 seconds. A clock symbol will appear in the
lower right-hand corner of the display to indicate that the procedure is running.
Note
Failure to complete an auto zero may result in a flow velocity error of 5 to10% at1 ft/s (0.3 m/s).
While the output level will be offset by the error, the repeatability will not be affected.
135
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 7: Digital Signal Processing
August 2015
7.5.3
Digital signal processing (DSP)
LOI menu path
Device Setup, Detailed Setup, Signal Processing
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,4
2,2,8,6
The 8732EM contains several advanced functions that can be used to stabilize erratic outputs
caused by process noise. The signal processing menu contains this functionality.
If the 37 Hz coil drive frequency has been set, and the output is still unstable, the damping and
signal processing function should be used. It is important to set the coil drive frequency to 37 Hz
to increase the flow sampling rate.
The 8732EM provides an easy and straightforward start-up, and also incorporates the capability
to deal with difficult applications that have previously manifested themselves in a noisy output
signal. In addition to selecting a higher coil drive frequency (37 Hz vs. 5 Hz) to isolate the flow
signal from the process noise, the 8732EM microprocessor can actually scrutinize each input
based on three user-defined parameters to reject the noise specific to the application.
Operating mode
LOI menu path
Device Setup, Detailed Setup, Signal Processing, Operating Mode
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,4,1
2,2,8,5
The operating mode should be used only when the signal is noisy and gives an unstable output.
Filter mode automatically uses 37 Hz coil drive mode and activates signal processing at the
factory set default values. When using filter mode, perform an auto zero with no flow and a full
sensor. Either of the parameters, coil drive mode or signal processing, may still be changed
individually. Turning signal processing off or changing the coil drive frequency to 5 Hz will
automatically change the operating mode from filter mode to normal mode.
This software technique, known as signal processing, “qualifies” individual flow signals based on
historic flow information and three user-definable parameters, plus an on/off control. These
parameters are described below.
Status
LOI menu path
Device Setup, Detailed Setup, Signal Processing, Main Config DSP, Status
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,4,2,1
2,2,8,6,1
Enable or disable the DSP capabilities. When ON is selected, the Rosemount 8732EM output is
derived using a running average of the individual flow inputs. Signal processing is a software
algorithm that examines the quality of the electrode signal against user-specified tolerances.
The three parameters that make up signal processing (number of samples, maximum percent
limit, and time limit) are described below.
Number of samples
LOI menu path
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
Device Setup, Detailed Setup, Signal Processing, Main Config DSP, Samples
1,4,4,2,2
2,2,8,6,2
The number of samples sets the amount of time that inputs are collected and used to calculate
the average value. Each second is divided into tenths with the number of samples equaling the
136
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 7: Digital Signal Processing
August 2015
number of increments used to calculate the average. This parameter can be configured for an
integer value between 1 and 125. The default value is 90 samples.
For example:
A value of 1 averages the inputs over the past 1/ second
10
A value of 10 averages the inputs over the past 1 second
A value of 100 averages the inputs over the past 10 seconds
A value of 125 averages the inputs over the past 12.5 seconds
Percent limit
LOI menu path
Device Setup, Detailed Setup, Signal Processing, Main Config DSP, % Limit
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,4,4,2,3
2,2,8,6,3
This parameter will set the tolerance band on either side of the running average, referring to
percent deviation from the average. Values within the limit are accepted while value outside the
limit are scrutinized to determine if they are a noise spike or an actual flow change. This
parameter can be configured for an integer value between 0 and 100 percent. The default value
is 2 percent.
Time limit
LOI menu path
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
Device Setup, Detailed Setup, Signal Processing, Main Config DSP, Time Limit
1,4,4,2,4
2,2,8,6,4
The time limit parameter forces the output and running average values to the new value of an
actual flow rate change that is outside the percent limit boundaries. It thereby limits response
time to flow changes to the time limit value rather than the length of the running average.
If the number of samples selected is 100, then the response time of the system is 10 seconds. In
some cases this may be unacceptable. Setting the time limit forces the 8732EM to clear the
value of the running average and re-establish the output and average at the new flow rate once
the time limit has elapsed. This parameter limits the response time added to the loop. A
suggested time limit value of two seconds is a good starting point for most applicable process
fluids. This parameter can be configured for a value between 0.6 and 256 seconds. The default
value is 2 seconds.
137
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 7: Digital Signal Processing
August 2015
7.6
Explanation of signal processing algorithm
An example plotting flow rate versus time is given below to help visualize the signal processing
algorithm.
Figure 7-1. Signal Processing Functionality
Flow
Rate
Max
%
Limit
Time Limit
10 Samples = 1
Second
Time
X: Input flow signal from sensor.
O: Average flow signals and transmitter output, determined by the number of samples
parameter.
Tolerance band, determined by the percent limit parameter.
- Upper value = average flow + [(percent limit/100) average flow]
- Lower value = average flow - [(percent limit/100) average flow]
1.
This scenario is that of a typical non-noisy flow. The input flow signal is within the
percent limit tolerance band, therefore qualifying itself as a good input. In this case the
new input is added directly into the running average and is passed on as a part of the
average value to the output.
2.
3.
This signal is outside the tolerance band and therefore is held in memory until the next
input can be evaluated. The running average is provided as the output.
The previous signal currently held in memory is simply rejected as a noise spike since
the next flow input signal is back within the tolerance band. This results in complete
rejection of noise spikes rather than allowing them to be “averaged” with the good
signals as occurs in the typical analog damping circuits.
4.
As in number 2 above, the input is outside the tolerance band. This first signal is held in
memory and compared to the next signal. The next signal is also outside the tolerance
band (in the same direction), so the stored value is added to the running average as the
next input and the running average begins to slowly approach the new input level.
138
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 7: Digital Signal Processing
August 2015
5.
To avoid waiting for the slowly incrementing average value to catch up to the new level
input, an algorithm is provided. This is the “time limit” parameter. The user can set this
parameter to eliminate the slow ramping of the output toward the new input level.
139
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 7: Digital Signal Processing
August 2015
140
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 8: Maintenance
August 2015
Section 8
Maintenance
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 141
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 141
Installing a Local Operator Interface (LOI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 142
Replacing 8732EM revision 4 electronics stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 143
Replacing socket module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 145
Trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 148
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 151
8.1
8.2
Introduction
This section covers basic transmitter maintenance. Instructions and procedures in this section
may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the
operations. Read the following safety messages before performing any operation described in
this section. Refer to these warnings when appropriate throughout this section.
Safety information
Failure to follow these maintenance guidelines could result in death or serious
injury.
Installation and servicing instructions should be performed by qualified personnel
only.
Do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions.
Verify the operating environment of the sensor and transmitter is consistent with the
appropriate hazardous area approval.
Do not connect a Rosemount 8732EM to a non-Rosemount sensor that is located in an
explosive atmosphere.
Mishandling products exposed to a hazardous substance may result in death or
serious injury.
If the product being returned was exposed to a hazardous substance as defined by
OSHA, a copy of the required Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each hazardous
substance identified must be included with the returned goods.
141
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 8: Maintenance
August 2015
8.3
Installing a Local Operator Interface (LOI)
Figure 8-1. Installing a Local Operator Interface (LOI)
1.
2.
3.
If the transmitter is installed in a control loop, secure the loop.
Remove power from the transmitter.
Remove the cover on the electronics compartment of the transmitter housing. If the
cover has a cover jam screw, loosen it before removing the cover. See “Cover jam screw”
on page 33 for details on the cover jam screw.
4.
5.
On the electronics stack, locate the serial connection labeled “DISPLAY”. See Figure
8-1.
Plug the serial connector from the back of the LOI into the receptacle on the electronics
stack. The LOI can be rotated in 90 degree increments to provide the best viewing
position. Rotate the LOI to the desired orientation, taking care to not exceed 360
degrees of rotation. Exceeding 360 degrees of rotation could damage the LOI cable
and/or connector.
6.
7.
Once the serial connector is installed on the electronics stack, and the LOI is oriented in
the desired position, tighten the three mounting screws.
Install the extended cover with the glass viewing pane and tighten to metal-to-metal
contact. If the cover has a cover jam screw, this must be tightened to comply with
installation requirements. Return power to the transmitter and verify that it is
functioning correctly and reporting the expected flow rate.
8.
If installed in a control loop, return the loop to automatic control.
142
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 8: Maintenance
August 2015
8.4
Replacing 8732EM revision 4 electronics stack
Prior to installing the replacement electronics stack, it is important to verify that the transmitter
housing you have is of the correct design to accept the Revision 4 electronics.
Follow the steps below to confirm the transmitter housing is compatible with this electronics
kit.
1.
Verify the model number is 8732EM. If the transmitter model is not 8732EM, then
number. If the model is 8732C, 8742C, 8732ES, or some other model, then these
electronics are not compatible with the enclosure. If you have one of these
Product Data Sheet (00813-0100-4444) for details on ordering a new transmitter.
Figure 8-2. Transmitter Nameplate Location
143
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 8: Maintenance
August 2015
2.
Verify the electronics board inside the housing is green and looks like the board
board pictured, then the electronics are not compatible.
Figure 8-3. Transmitter Housing Electronics Board Identification
3.
Confirm the electronics stack is for an 8732EM transmitter. Refer to the picture on the
Figure 8-4. Electronics Stack Identification
144
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 8: Maintenance
August 2015
8.5
Replacing socket module
The socket module connects the sensor adapter to the transmitter. There are two versions of
the socket module - one for integral mount transmitters and one for remote mount
transmitters. The socket module is a replaceable component.
To remove the socket module, loosen the two mounting screws and pull up on the socket
module from the base. When removing the socket module, do not pull on the wires. See
Figure 8-5. Socket Module Warning
8.5.1
Integral mount socket module
the transmitter must be removed from the sensor adapter.
Figure 8-6. Socket Module—Integral Mount
145
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 8: Maintenance
August 2015
Removing integral mount socket module
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect power.
Remove electronics cover to gain access to the coil and electrode cables.
If the transmitter has an LOI, it will need to be removed to gain access to the coil and
electrode cables.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Disconnect the coil and electrode cables.
Remove the four transmitter mounting screws.
Lift the transmitter off of the sensor adapter.
To remove the socket module, loosen the two mounting screws and pull up on the
socket module from the base.
8.
Installing integral mount socket module
1.
To insert a new integral mount socket module, press the base into its keyed position
and tighten the two mounting screws.
2.
The coil and electrode cables are fed through the bottom opening of the transmitter
and plugged into the face of the electronics.
3.
4.
The coil and electrode cables are keyed so they will only fit into their dedicated location.
If the transmitter has an LOI, it will need to be removed to access the coil and electrode
ports.
5.
Once the connections are made, the transmitter can be secured to the sensor adapter
using the four mounting bolts.
146
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 8: Maintenance
August 2015
8.5.2
Replacing terminal block socket module
remove the junction box from the sensor adapter.
Figure 8-7. Socket Module—Terminal Block
Removing terminal block socket module
1.
Disconnect power to the transmitter and the remote cabling connected to the terminal
block.
2.
3.
Remove the junction box cover to gain access to the remote cabling.
To disconnect the terminal block from the junction box housing, remove the two
mounting screws and the two divider mounting screws (if applicable).
4.
5.
Pull up on the terminal block to expose the socket module base.
To remove the socket module, loosen the two mounting screws and pull up on the
socket module from the base.
6.
147
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 8: Maintenance
August 2015
Installing terminal block socket module
1.
2.
3.
Insert the new terminal block socket module, press the base into its keyed position, and
tighten the two mounting screws.
Connect the terminal block to the junction box housing by tightening the two
mounting screws. Install the divider with the two mounting screws if applicable.
Reconnect remote cabling and power and replace junction box cover.
8.6
Trims
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Trims
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,2,5
3,4
Trims are used to calibrate the analog loop, calibrate the transmitter, re-zero the transmitter,
and calibrate the transmitter with another manufacturer's sensor. Proceed with caution
whenever performing a trim function.
8.6.1
D/A trim
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Trims, D/A Trim
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,2,5,1
3,4,4,5
The D/A trim is used to calibrate the 4-20mA analog loop output from the transmitter. For
maximum accuracy, the analog output should be trimmed for your system loop. Use the
following steps to complete the output trim function.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Set the loop to manual, if necessary.
Connect a precision ammeter in the 4-20mA loop.
Initiate the D/A trim function with the LOI or Handheld Communicator.
Enter the 4mA meter value when prompted.
Enter the 20mA meter value when prompted.
Return the loop to automatic control, if necessary.
The 4-20mA trim is now complete. The D/A trim can be repeated to check the results.
Alternatively, the analog output test can also be used to verify loop performance.
148
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 8: Maintenance
August 2015
8.6.2
Scaled D/A trim
LOI menu path
Diagnostics, Trims, Scaled D/A Trim
1,2,5,2 or 1,4,2,1,7
3,4,4,6
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
A scaled D/A trim enables calibration of the flowmeter analog output using a different scale than
the standard 4-20mA output scale. Non-scaled D/A trimming (described above), is typically
performed using an ammeter where calibration values are entered in units of milliamperes.
Scaled D/A trimming enables trimming of the flowmeter using a scale that may be more
convenient based upon the method of measurement.
For example, it may be more convenient to make current measurements by direct voltage
readings across the loop resistor. If the loop resistor is 500 ohms, and calibration of the meter
will be done using voltage measurements across this resistor, the trim points can be rescaled
from 4-20mA to 4-20mA x 500 ohm or 2-10VDC. Once the scaled trim points have been entered
as 2 and 10, calibration of the flowmeter can be done by entering voltage measurements
directly from the voltmeter.
8.6.3
Digital trim
LOI menu path
Device Setup, Diagnostics, Trims, Digital Trim
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,2,5,3
3,4,5
Digital trim is the function by which the factory calibrates the transmitter. This procedure is
rarely needed by users. It is only necessary if the Rosemount 8732EM is suspected to be no
longer accurate. A Rosemount 8714D Calibration Standard is required to complete a digital
trim. Attempting a digital trim without a Rosemount 8714D Calibration Standard may result in
an inaccurate transmitter or an error message. The digital trim must be performed with the coil
drive mode set to 5Hz and with a nominal sensor calibration number stored in the memory.
Note
Attempting a digital trim without a Rosemount 8714D Calibration Standard may result in an
inaccurate transmitter, or a “DIGITAL TRIM FAILURE” message may appear. If this message
occurs, no values were changed in the transmitter. Simply cycle power on the Rosemount
8732EM to clear the message.
To simulate a nominal sensor with the Rosemount 8714D Calibration Standard, change/verify
the following five parameters in the Rosemount 8732EM:
Calibration Number-1000015010000000
Units-ft/s
PV URV-20mA = 30.00 ft/s
PV LRV-4mA = 0 ft/s
Coil Drive Frequency-5Hz
149
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 8: Maintenance
August 2015
Note
Before changing any of the configuration parameters, be sure to record the original values so
that the transmitter can be returned to the original configuration prior to being placed back into
operation. Failure to return the settings to the original configuration will result in incorrect flow
and totalizer readings.
The instructions for changing the calibration number, units, PV URV, and PV LRV are located in
“Basic setup” on page 34. Instructions for changing the coil drive frequency can be found on
Set the loop to manual (if necessary) and then complete the following steps:
1.
2.
3.
Power down the transmitter.
Connect the transmitter to a Rosemount 8714D Calibration Standard.
Power up the transmitter with the Rosemount 8714D connected and read the flow rate.
The electronics need about a 5-minute warm-up time to stabilize.
4.
5.
Set the 8714D Calibration Standard to the 30 ft/s (9.1 m/s) setting.
The flow rate reading after warm-up should be between 29.97 (9.1 m/s) and 30.03 ft/s
(9.2 m/s).
6.
7.
If the reading is within the range, return the transmitter to the original configuration
parameters.
If the reading is not within this range, initiate a digital trim with the LOI or Handheld
Communicator. The digital trim takes about 90 seconds to complete. No transmitter
adjustments are required.
8.6.4
Universal trim
LOI menu path
Device Setup, Diagnostics, Trims, Universal Trim
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
1,2,5,5
2,4,1
The universal auto trim function enables the Rosemount 8732EM to calibrate sensors that were
not calibrated at the Rosemount factory. The function is activated as one step in a procedure
known as in-process calibration. If a Rosemount sensor has a 16-digit calibration number,
in-process calibration is not required. If it does not, or if the sensor is made by another
manufacturer, complete the following steps for in-process calibration. Refer to Appendix D
1.
Determine the flow rate of the process fluid in the sensor.
Note
The flow rate in the line can be determined by using another sensor in the line, by counting the
revolutions of a centrifugal pump, or by performing a bucket test to determine how fast a given
volume is filled by the process fluid.
2.
Complete the universal auto trim function.
150
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 8: Maintenance
August 2015
When the routine is completed, the sensor is ready for use.
8.7
Review
LOI menu path
Device Setup, Review
1,5
Traditional fast keys
Device dashboard
N/A
The 8732EM includes a capability to review the configuration variable settings.
The flowmeter configuration parameters set at the factory should be reviewed to ensure
accuracy and compatibility with the particular application of the flowmeter.
Note
If the LOI is used to review variables, each variable must be accessed as if changing its setting.
The value displayed on the LOI screen is the configured value of the variable.
151
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
Section 9
Troubleshooting
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 153
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 154
Installation check and guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 154
Diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 157
Basic troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 166
Sensor troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 169
9.1
Introduction
This section covers basic transmitter and sensor troubleshooting. Problems in the magnetic
flowmeter system are usually indicated by incorrect output readings from the system, error
messages, or failed tests. Consider all sources when identifying a problem in the system. If the
problem persists, consult the local Rosemount representative to determine if the material
should be returned to the factory. Emerson Process Management offers several diagnostics that
aid in the troubleshooting process. Instructions and procedures in this section may require
special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Read the
following safety messages before performing any operation described in this section. Refer to
these warnings when appropriate throughout this section.
The Rosemount 8732EM performs self-diagnostics on the entire magnetic flowmeter system:
the transmitter, the sensor, and the interconnecting wiring. By sequentially troubleshooting
each individual piece of the magmeter system, it becomes easier to identify the problem and
make the appropriate adjustments.
If there are problems with a new magmeter installation, see 9.3 Installation check and guide
below for a quick guide to solve the most common installation problems. For existing magmeter
actions.
153
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
9.2
Safety information
Failure to follow these troubleshotting guidelines could result in death or serious
injury.
Installation and servicing instructions should be performed by qualified personnel
only.
Do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions.
Verify that the operating environment of the sensor and transmitter is consistent with
the appropriate hazardous area approval.
Do not connect a Rosemount 8732EM to a non-Rosemount sensor that is located in an
explosive atmosphere.
Mishandling products exposed to a hazardous substance may result in death or
serious injury.
If the product being returned was exposed to a hazardous substance as defined by
OSHA, a copy of the required Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each hazardous
substance identified must be included with the returned goods.
9.3
Installation check and guide
Use this guide to check new installations of Rosemount magnetic flowmeter systems that
appear to malfunction.
9.3.1
Transmitter
Before applying power to the magnetic flowmeter system, make the following transmitter
checks:
1.
2.
3.
Record the transmitter model number and serial number.
Visually inspect the transmitter for any damage including the terminal block.
Verify the proper wiring connections have been made for the power and outputs.
154
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
Apply power to the magnetic flowmeter system before making the following transmitter
checks:
1.
2.
Verify the correct sensor calibration number is entered in the transmitter. The
calibration number is listed on the sensor nameplate.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Verify the correct sensor line size is entered in the transmitter. The line size value is
listed on the sensor nameplate.
Verify the analog range of the transmitter matches the analog range in the control
system.
Verify the forced analog output and forced pulse output of the transmitter produces
the correct output at the control system.
If desired, use a Rosemount 8714D to verify the transmitter calibration.
9.3.2
Sensor
Be sure that power to magnetic flowmeter system is removed before beginning the following
sensor checks:
1.
2.
Record the sensor model number and serial number.
Visually inspect the sensor for any damage including inside the remote junction box, if
applicable.
3.
For horizontal flow installations, ensure that the electrodes remain covered by process
fluid. For vertical or inclined installations, ensure that the process fluid is flowing up into
the sensor to keep the electrodes covered by process fluid.
4.
5.
Verify the flow arrow is pointing in the same direction as forward flow.
Ensure the grounding straps on the sensor are connected to grounding rings, lining
protectors, or the adjacent pipe flanges. Improper grounding will cause erratic
operation of the system. Sensors with a ground electrode will not require the
grounding straps to be connected.
155
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
9.3.3
Remote wiring
1.
The electrode signal and coil drive wires must be separate cables, unless Rosemount
2.
The electrode signal wire and coil drive wire must be twisted shielded cable.
Rosemount recommends 20 AWG twisted shielded cable for the electrode signal and
3.
4.
5.
Verify there is minimal exposed wiring and shielding. Less than 1 inch (25 mm) is
recommended.
6.
The single conduit that houses both the electrode signal and coil drive cables should
not contain any other wires. This includes wires from other magmeters.
Note
For installations requiring intrinsically safe electrodes, the signal and coil drive cables must be
run in Individual conduits.
9.3.4
Process fluid
1.
The process fluid should have a minimum conductivity of 5 microSiemens/cm (5 micro
mhos/cm).
2.
3.
4.
The process fluid must be free of air and gas.
The sensor must be full of process fluid.
The process fluid must be compatible with the wetted materials - liner, electrodes,
ground rings, and lining protectors. Refer to the “Rosemount Magnetic Flowmeter
Material Selection Guide” (00816-0100-3033) Technical Note for details.
5.
If the process is electrolytic or has cathodic protection, refer to the “Installation and
Technical Note for special installation requirements.
156
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
9.4
Diagnostic messages
Problems in the magnetic flowmeter system are usually indicated by incorrect output readings
from the system, error messages, or failed tests. Consider all sources in identifying a problem in
the system.
Table 9-1. Basic Diagnostic Messages
Error message
Potential cause
Empty pipe
Corrective action
• None - message will clear when pipe is full
• Check that wiring matches appropriate wiring diagrams
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 172
Wiring error
Electrode error
Empty Pipe
Conductivity less than 5
microSiemens per cm
• Increase conductivity to greater than or equal to 5 microSiemens per
cm
Intermittent diagnostic
Improper wiring
• Adjust tuning of empty pipe parameters - see Section 8.4.1
• Check coil drive wiring and sensor coils
Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 172
• Change coil current to 75 mA - set calibration numbers to
10000550100000030
• Perform a universal auto-trim to select the proper coil current
Other manufacturer’s sensor
Coil Open Circuit
Auto Zero Failure
Electronics board failure
Coil circuit open fuse
Flow is not set to zero
Unshielded cable in use
Moisture problems
• Replace 8732EM electronics stack
• Return the unit to the factory for fuse replacement
• Force flow to zero, perform auto zero trim
• Change wire to shielded cable
• See Table 9-8 on page 172
No flow in pipe while performing
Universal Auto Trim
• Establish a known flow rate, and perform universal auto-trim
calibration
• Check that wiring matches appropriate wiring diagrams - see
Wiring error
Flow rate is changing in pipe while
performing Universal Auto-Trim
routine
• Establish a constant flow rate, and perform universal auto-trim
calibration
Flow rate through sensor is
significantly different than value
entered during Universal Auto-Trim
routine
• Verify flow in sensor and perform universal auto-trim calibration
Auto-Trim Failure
Incorrect calibration number entered
into transmitter for Universal
Auto-Trim routine
• Replace sensor calibration number with 1000005010000000
Wrong sensor size selected
Sensor failure
• Correct sensor size setting - see Line size on page 34
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 172
• Cycle power to see if diagnostic message clears
• Replace Electronics stack
Electronics Failure
Electronics self check failure
Ambient temperature exceeded the
electronics temperature limits
• Move transmitter to a location with an ambient temperature range of
-40 to 140 °F (-40 to 60 °C)
Electronics Temp Fail
Electrode or coil wires reverse
Flow is reverse
• Verify wiring between sensor and transmitter
• Turn ON Reverse Flow Enable to read flow
Reverse Flow
• Install sensor correctly, or switch either the electrode wires (18 and 19)
or the coil wires (1 and 2)
Sensor installed backwards
External voltage applied to terminals
5 and 6
PZR Activated
(Positive Zero Return)
• Remove voltage to turn PZR off
157
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
Table 9-1. Basic Diagnostic Messages (continued)
Error message
Potential cause
Corrective action
• Standard pulse - increase pulse scaling to prevent pulse output from
exceeding 11,000 Hz
• Intrinsically safe pulse - Increase pulse scaling to prevent pulse output
from exceeding 5,500 Hz
• Pulse output is in fixed pulse mode and is trying to generate a
frequency greater than the pulse width can support - see Pulse width
The transmitter is trying to generate
a frequency greater than allowed
Pulse Out of Range
• Verify the sensor calibration number and line size are correctly entered
in the electronics
• Reduce flow, adjust URV and LRV values
• Verify the sensor calibration number and line sizes are correctly entered
in the electronics
Flow rate is greater than analog
output range
Analog Out of Range
Flowrate > 43 ft/sec
Flow rate is greater than 43 ft/sec
Improper wiring
• Lower flow velocity, increase pipe diameter
• Check coil drive wiring and sensor coils
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 172
The calibrator (8714B/C/D) is not
connected properly
• Review calibrator connections
Digital Trim Failure
(Cycle power to clear
messages, no changes
were made)
Incorrect calibration number entered
into transmitter
• Replace sensor calibration number with 1000015010000000
Calibrator is not set to 30 FPS
• Change calibrator setting to 30 FPS
Bad calibrator or calibrator cable
• Replace calibrator and/or calibrator cable
• Check coil drive wiring and sensor coils
Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 172
Improper wiring
Coil Over Current
Transmitter failure
Improper wiring
• Replace the electronics stack
• Check coil drive wiring and sensor coils
Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 172
Incorrect calibration number
• Verify configured calibration number matches sensor tag
Transmitter connected to other
manufacturer’s sensor
• Change coil current to 75 mA - set calibration number to
10000550100000030
Coil Power Limit
• Perform a universal auto-trim to select the proper coil current
Coil drive frequency set to 37 Hz
• Sensor may not be compatible with 37 Hz. Switch coil drive frequency
to 5 Hz.
Sensor failure
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 172
Improper wiring
• Check the analog loop wiring - see Wiring the transmitter on page 23
• Verify the analog power switch position (internal/external)
• For externally powered loop, verify power supply requirements - see
No external loop power
No AO Power
• Install resistance across the analog output terminals
• Disable message using LOI Error Mask parameter
No loop resistance (open loop)
Transmitter failure
• Replace the electronics stack
Improper wiring
Improper process reference
• Verify earth ground connections - see Wiring the transmitter on
Electrode Saturation
Improper earth grounding
Application requires special
transmitter
• Replace transmitter with transmitter that includes special option F0100
158
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
Table 9-2. Advanced Process Diagnostic Messages
Error message
Potential cause
Corrective action
Improper installation of wiring
Coil/electrode shield not connected
Improper process grounding
• Check wiring for corrosion, moisture in the terminal block -see
Grounding/Wiring Fault
Faulty ground connection
Sensor not full
• Verify sensor is full
• Enable empty pipe detection
• Decrease the flow rate below 10 ft/s (3 m/s)
• Complete the possible solutions listed under Troubleshooting high
Slurry flows - mining/pulp stock
• Move injection point downstream of the sensor or move the sensor to
a new location
• Complete the possible solutions listed under Troubleshooting high
Chemical additives upstream of the
sensor
Electrode not compatible with the
process fluid
• Refer to the Rosemount Magnetic Flowmeter Material Selection Guide
(00816-0100-3033)
• Move the sensor to another location in the process line to ensure that
it is full under all conditions
Gas/air in line
High Process Noise
• Enable coated electrode etection diagnostic
• Use bullet-nose electrodes
• Downsize sensor to increase flowrate above 3 ft/s (1 m/s)
• Periodically clean sensor
Electrode coating
• Complete the possible solutions listed under Troubleshooting high
• Consult factory
Styrofoam or other insulating
particles
• Trim electrode and coil wires - see Sensor installation on page 12
• Use integral mount transmitter
• Set coil drive frequency to 37Hz
Low conductivity fluids
(below 10 microsiemens/cm)
Coating is starting to buildup on
electrode and interfering with
measurement signal
• Schedule maintenance to clean electrode
• Use bullet nose electrodes
• Downsize sensor to increase flow rate above 3ft/s (1ms)
Electrode Coating Level 1
Electrode Coating Level 2
Process fluid conductivity has
changed
• Verify process fluid conductivity
Coating has built-up on electrode
and is interfering with measurement
signal
• Schedule maintenance to clean electrode
• Use bullet nose electrodes
• Downsize sensor to increase flow rate above 3ft/s (1ms)
Process fluid conductivity has
changed
• Verify process fluid conductivity
159
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
Table 9-3. Advanced Meter Verification Messages
Error message
Potential cause
Corrective action
• Verify pass/fail criteria
• Rerun SMART™ Meter Verification (8714i) under no flow conditions
• Verify calibration using 8714 Calibration Standard
• Perform digital trim
Transmitter calibration verification
test failed
• Replace electronics board
• Verify pass/fail criteria
Sensor calibration test failed
Sensor coil circuit test failed
• Rerun SMART Meter Verification (8714i)
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 172
8714i Failed
• Verify pass/fail criteria
• Rerun SMART Meter Verification (8714i)
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 172
• Verify electrode resistance has a baseline (signature) value from a full
pipe baseline
• Verify test condition was selected properly
• Verify pass/fail criteria
Sensor electrode circuit test failed
• Rerun SMART Meter Verification (8714i)
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 172
• Check 4-20 mA internal/external loop power switch - see
• Check external supply voltage to the transmitter
• Check for parallel paths in the current loop
Analog loop not powered
Transmitter failure
4-20 mA loop
verification failed
• Perform transmitter self test
• Perform manual analog loop test and D/A trim if necessary
• Replace the electronics board
• Verify pass/fail criteria
• Run manual SMART Meter Verification (8714i) under no flow conditions
• Verify calibration using 8714D Calibration Standard
• Perform digital trim
Transmitter calibration verification
test failed
• Replace electronics stack
• Run manual SMART Meter Verification (8714i)
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 172
Sensor calibration test failed
Sensor coil circuit test failed
Continuous Meter
Verification Error
• Run manual SMART Meter Verification (8714i)
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 172
• Run manual SMART Meter Verification (8714i)
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 172
• Verify electrode resistance has a signature value from a full pipe
baseline
Sensor electrode circuit test failed
Unstable flow rate during the
verification test or noisy process
• Run manual transmitter verification test with no flow and a full pipe
• Verify transmitter electronics with 8714D Calibration Standard. The
dial on the 8714D should be set to 30 ft/s (9.14 m/s). The transmitter
should be set up with the nominal calibration number
Simulated Velocity Out of
Spec
Transmitter drift or faulty
electronics
(1000015010000000) and 5 Hz coil drive frequency.
• Perform an electronics trim using the 8714
• If the electronics trim doesn't correct the issue, replace the electronics
Moisture in the terminal block of the
sensor or shorted coil
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 172
• If the problem persists, replace the sensor
Coil Resistance Out of
Spec
Moisture in the terminal block of the
sensor or shorted coil
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 172
• If the problem persists, replace the sensor
Coil Signature Out of Spec
Calibration shift caused by heat
cycling or vibration
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 172
• If the problem persists, replace the sensor
160
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
Table 9-3. Advanced Meter Verification Messages (continued)
Error message
Potential cause
Corrective action
Moisture in the terminal block of the
sensor
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 172
• If the problem persists, replace the sensor
• Enable coated electrode detection diagnostic
• Use bullet-nose electrodes
• Downsize sensor to increases flowrate above 3 ft/s (1 m/s)
• Periodically clean sensor
Electrode Resistance Out
of Spec
Electrode coating
• Perform sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 172
• If the problem persists, replace the sensor
Shorted electrodes
Unstable flow rate during the
verification test or noisy process
• Run manual transmitter verification test with no flow and a full pipe
Analog Output Out of
Spec
Analog output is no longer within
accuracy specifications
• Check the analog loop wiring. Excessive loop resistance can cause an
invalid test
161
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
9.4.1
Troubleshooting empty pipe
The following actions can be taken if empty pipe detection is unexpected:
1.
2.
Verify the sensor is full.
Verify the sensor has not been installed with a measurement electrode at the top of the
pipe.
3.
4.
Decrease the sensitivity by setting the empty pipe trigger level to a value of at least 20
counts above the empty pipe value read with a full pipe.
Decrease the sensitivity by increasing the empty pipe counts to compensate for process
noise. The empty pipe counts is the number of consecutive empty pipe value readings
above the empty pipe trigger level required to set the empty pipe diagnostic. The count
range is 2-50, factory default set at 5.
5.
6.
Increase process fluid conductivity above 50 microsiemens/cm.
Properly connect the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter. Corresponding
terminal block numbers in the sensor and transmitter must be connected.
7.
Perform the sensor electrical resistance tests. For more detailed information, consult
9.4.2
Troubleshooting ground/wiring fault
If transmitter detects high levels (greater than 5mV) 50/60 Hz noise caused by improper wiring
or poor process grounding:
1.
2.
Verify the transmitter is earth grounded.
Connect ground rings, grounding electrode, lining protector, or grounding straps.
3.
4.
Verify the sensor is full.
Verify wiring between sensor and transmitter is prepared properly. Shielding should be
stripped back less than 1 inch (25 mm).
5.
6.
Use separate shielded twisted pairs for wiring between sensor and transmitter.
Properly connect the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter. Corresponding
terminal block numbers in the sensor and transmitter must be connected.
162
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
9.4.3
Troubleshooting high process noise
The transmitter detected high levels of process noise. If the signal to noise ratio is less than 25
while operating in 5 Hz mode, proceed with the following steps:
1.
Increase transmitter coil drive frequency to 37 Hz (refer to Coil drive frequency on
2.
Verify sensor is electrically connected to the process with process reference electrode,
grounding rings with grounding straps, or lining protector with grounding straps.
3.
4.
If possible, redirect chemical additions downstream of the magmeter.
Verify process fluid conductivity is above 10 microSiemens/cm.
If the signal to noise ratio is less than 25 while operating in 37 Hz mode, proceed with the
following steps:
1.
Turn on the Digital Signal Processing (DSP) technology and follow the setup procedure
flow measurement and control loop while also stabilizing the reading to minimize valve
actuation.
2.
3.
response time to the control loop.
Move to a Rosemount High-Signal flowmeter system. This flowmeter will deliver a
stable signal by increasing the amplitude of the flow signal by ten times to increase the
signal to noise ratio. For example if the signal to noise ratio (SNR) of a standard
magmeter is 5, the High-Signal would have a SNR of 50 in the same application. The
Rosemount High-Signal system is comprised of the 8707 sensor which has modified
coils and magnetics and the 8712H High-Signal transmitter.
Note
In applications where very high levels of noise are a concern, it is recommended that a
dual-calibrated Rosemount High-Signal 8707 sensor be used. These sensors can be calibrated to
run at lower coil drive current supplied by the standard Rosemount transmitters, but can also be
upgraded by changing to the 8712H High-Signal transmitter.
1/f noise
This type of noise has higher amplitudes at lower frequencies, but generally degrades over
increasing frequencies. Potential sources of 1/f noise include chemical mixing and slurry flow
particles rubbing against the electrodes. This type of noise can be mitigated by switching to the
37Hz coil drive frequency.
Spike noise
This type of noise generally results in a high amplitude signal at specific frequencies which can
vary depending on the source of the noise. Common sources of spike noise include chemical
injections directly upstream of the flowmeter, hydraulic pumps, and slurry flows with low
concentrations of particles in the stream. The particles bounce off of the electrode generating a
“spike” in the electrode signal. An example of this type of flow stream would be a recycle flow in
163
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
a paper mill. The type of noise can be mitigated by switching to the 37Hz coil drive frequency
and enabling the digital signal processing.
White noise
This type of noise results in a high amplitude signal that is relatively constant over the frequency
range. Common sources of white noise include chemical reactions or mixing that occurs as the
fluid passes through the flowmeter and high concentration slurry flows where the particulates
are constantly passing over the electrode head. An example of this type of flow stream would be
a basis weight stream in a paper mill. This type of noise can be mitigated by switching to the
37Hz coil drive frequency and enabling the digital signal processing.
9.4.4
Troubleshooting coated electrode detection
In the event that electrode coating is detected, use the following table to determine the
appropriate course of action.
Table 9-4. Troubleshooting the Electrode Coating Diagnostic
Error message
Potential causes of error
Steps to correct
• Insulating coating is starting to build up on • Verify process fluid conductivity
the electrode and may interfere with the
flow measurement signal
• Process fluid conductivity has decreased to • Replace the meter with a smaller diameter meter to
• Schedule maintenance to clean the electrodes
• Use bullet nose electrodes
Electrode Coating Level 1
a level close to operational limits of the
meter
increase the flow velocity to above 3 ft/s (1 m/s)
• Insulating coating has built up on the
• Verify process fluid conductivity
electrodes and is interfering with the flow • Schedule maintenance to clean the electrodes
measurement signal • Use bullet nose electrodes
• Process fluid conductivity has decreased to • Replace the meter with a smaller diameter meter to
Electrode Coating Level 2
a level below the operational limits of the
meter
increase the flow velocity to above 3 ft/s (1 m/s)
9.4.5
Troubleshooting 4-20 mA loop verification
In the event that the 4-20 mA Loop Verification fails, use the following table to determine the
appropriate course of action.
Table 9-5. Troubleshooting the Analog Loop Verification Diagnostic
Test
Potential cause
Corrective action
• Analog loop not powered
• Check analog loop wiring
• Check loop resistance
• Check analog loop power switch – see Internal/external
• Check external supply voltage to the transmitter
• Check for parallel paths in the current loop
4-20 mA Loop Verification Failure
• Analog drift
• Perform D/A trim
• Transmitter failure
• Perform transmitter self-test
• Perform manual analog loop test
• Replace the electronics stack
164
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
9.4.6
Troubleshooting the SMART Meter Verification test
If the SMART Meter Verification test fails, use the following table to determine the appropriate
course of action. Begin by reviewing the SMART Meter Verification results to determine the
specific test that failed.
Table 9-6. Troubleshooting the SMART Meter Verification Diagnostic
Test
Potential cause
Corrective action
• Unstable flow reading during the test • Rerun SMART Meter Verification (8714i) under No Flow
• Noise in the process
• Transmitter drift
• Faulty electronics
conditions
• Check the transmitter calibration with the 8714D
Calibration Standard
Transmitter Verification Test
• Perform a digital trim
• Replace the electronics stack
• Moisture in the sensor terminal block • Rerun SMART Meter Verification (8714i)
Sensor Calibration Verification
Coil Circuit Health
• Calibration shift caused by heat
cycling or vibration
• Perform the sensor checks detailed in 9.6 Sensor
• Remove the sensor and send back for evaluation and / or
recalibration
• Moisture in the sensor terminal block
• Shorted Coil
• Electrode resistance baseline was not
taken after installation
• Test condition was not selected
properly
Electrode Circuit Health
• Moisture in the sensor terminal block
• Coated electrodes
• Shorted electrodes
165
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
9.5
Basic troubleshooting
common symptoms displayed by a magmeter that is not functioning properly. This table
provides potential causes and suggested corrective actions for each symptom.
Table 9-7. Common Magmeter Issue
Symptom
Potential cause
Corrective action
• No power to transmitter
• Check power source and connections to the transmitter
• Analog output improperly
configured
• Check the analog power switch position
• Verify wiring and analog power
Output at 0 mA
• Electronics failure
• Verify transmitter operation with an 8714D Calibration Standard or
replace the electronic stack
• Blown fuse
• Check the fuse and replace with an appropriately rated fuse, if
necessary
• Transmitter in multidrop mode
• Low Flow Cutoff set too high
• Configure Poll Address to 0 to take transmitter out of multidrop
mode
• Configure Low Flow Cutoff to a lower setting or increase flow to a
value above the low flow cutoff
• PZR Activated
• Open PZR switch at terminals 5 and 6 to deactivate the PZR
• Enable Reverse Flow function
• Coil check – perform sensor test
• Fill pipe
Output at 4 mA
• Flow is in reverse direction
• Shorted coil
• Empty pipe
• Electronics failure
• Verify transmitter operation with an 8714D Calibration Standard or
replace the electronics stack
• Loop resistance is greater than
600 ohms
• Reduce loop resistance to less than 600 ohms
• Perform analog loop test
Output will not reach 20 mA
Output at 20.8 mA
• Insufficient supply voltage to
analog output
• Verify analog output supply voltage
• Perform analog loop test
• Transmitter not ranged properly • Reset the transmitter range values –
• Check tube size setting in transmitter and make sure it matches the
actual tube size – see Line size on page 34
• Electronics failure
• Open coil circuit
• Cycle power. If alarm is still present, verify transmitter operation with
an 8714 D Calibration Standard or replace the electronics stack
• Check coil drive circuit connections at the sensor and at the
transmitter
• Analog output diagnostic alarm
is active
Output at alarm level
• Coil power or coil current is over • Check coil drive circuit connections at the sensor and at the
limit
transmitter
• Cycle power. If alarm is still present, verify transmitter operation with
an 8714 D Calibration Standard or replace the electronics stack
• Connected to incompatible
sensor
166
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
Table 9-7. Common Magmeter Issue (continued)
Symptom
Potential cause
Corrective action
• Wiring error
• Check pulse output wiring at terminals 3 and 4. Refer to wiring
diagram for pulse counter and pulse output. See Connect pulse
• PZR activated
• Remove signal at terminals 5 and 6 to deactivate the PZR.
• No power to transmitter
• Check pulse output wiring at terminals 3 and 4. Refer to wiring
diagram for pulse counter and pulse output.
• Power the transmitter
Pulse output at zero,
regardless of flow
• Reverse flow
• Enable Reverse Flow function
• Electronics failure
• Verify transmitter operation with an 8714D Calibration Standard or
replace the electronics stack
• Pulse output incorrectly
configured
• Review configuration and correct as necessary
• 4–20 mA output configuration
• Check analog power switch (internal/external). The Handheld
Communicator requires a 4–20 mA output to function.
• Communication interface wiring • Incorrect load resistance (250 Ohm minimum, 600 Ohm maximum)
Communication problems
with the Handheld
Communicator
problems
Check appropriate wiring diagram
• Low batteries in the Handheld
Communicator
• Replace the batteries in the Handheld Communicator – see the
communicator manual for instructions
• Old revision of software in the
Handheld Communicator
• Consult your local sales office about updating to the latest revision
of software
Error Messages on LOI or
Handheld Communicator
• Many possible causes depending • See Table 9-1 on page 157, Table 9-2 on page 159, and Table 9-3 on
upon the message
page 160 for the LOI or Handheld Communicator messages
• Input signal does not provide
enough counts
• Verify that the discrete input provided meets the requirements in
Section 3.4.3 Connect discrete input
Discrete input does not
register
• Perform a loop test to validate the analog control loop
• Perform a D/A trim. This allows the calibration of the analog output
with an external reference at operating endpoints of the analog
output.
167
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
Table 9-7. Common Magmeter Issue (continued)
Symptom
Potential cause
Corrective action
• Transmitter, control system, or
other receiving device not
configured properly
• Check all configuration variables for the transmitter, sensor,
communicator, and/or control system
• Check these other transmitter settings:
•Sensor calibration number
•Units
•Line size
•Perform a loop test to check the integrity of the circuit
• Electrode Coating
• Enable Coated Electrode Detection diagnostic
• Use bullet-nose electrodes
• Downsize sensor to increase flow rate above 3 ft/s
• Periodically clean sensor
• Gas/air in line
• Move the sensor to another location in the process line to ensure it is
full under all conditions
• Moisture problem
• Perform the sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 172
• Insufficient
upstream/downstream pipe
diameter
• Move sensor to a new location with 5 pipe diameters upstream and 2
pipe diameters downstream if possible
Reading does not appear to
be within rated accuracy
• Cables for multiple magmeters
run through same conduit
• Use dedicated conduit run for each sensor and transmitter
• Improper wiring
• If electrode shield and electrode signal wires are switched, flow
indication will be about half of what is expected. Check wiring
diagrams.
• Flow rate is below 1 ft/s
(specification issue)
• See accuracy specification for specific transmitter and sensor
• Auto zero was not performed
when the coil drive frequency
was changed from 5 Hz to 37 Hz
• Set the coil drive frequency to 37 Hz, verify the sensor is full, verify
there is no flow, and perform the auto zero function
• Sensor failure–shorted
electrode
• Perform the sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 172
• Perform the sensor tests - see Table 9-8 on page 172
• Sensor failure–shorted or open
coil
• Transmitter failure
• Verify transmitter operation with an 8714 Calibration Standard or
replace the electronics board
• Chemical additives upstream of
magnetic flowmeter
• Move injection point downstream of magnetic flowmeter, or move
magnetic flowmeter
• Sludge flows–mining/coal/
sand/slurries (other slurries with
hard particles)
• Decrease flow rate below 10 ft/s
• Styrofoam or other insulating
particles in process
• Consult factory
Noisy Process
• Electrode coating
• Enable Coated Electrode Detection diagnostic
• Use a smaller sensor to increase flow rate above 3 ft/s
• Periodically clean sensor
• Gas/air in line
• Move the sensor to another location in the process line to ensure it is
full under all conditions
• Low conductivity fluids (below
10 microsiemens/cm)
• Trim electrode and coil wires – see Cable preparation on page 27
• Keep flow rate below 3 FPS
• Integral mount transmitter
• Use component cable - see Table 2-11 on page 25
168
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
Table 9-7. Common Magmeter Issue (continued)
Symptom
Potential cause
Corrective action
• Medium to low conductivity
fluids (10–25
microsiemens/cm) combined
with cable vibration or 60 Hz
interference
• Eliminate cable vibration
• Move cable to lower vibration run
• Tie down cable mechanically
• Use an integral mount
• Trim electrode and coil wires - see Cable preparation on page 27
• Route cable line away from other equipment
powered by 60 Hz
• Use component cable - see Table 2-11 on page 25
• Electrode incompatibility
• Improper grounding
• Check the Technical Data Sheet, Magnetic Flowmeter Material
Selection Guide (document number 00816-0100-3033), for
chemical compatibility with electrode material
• Check ground wiring – see Process reference connection on page 19
for wiring and grounding procedures
Meter output is unstable
• High local magnetic or electric
fields
• Move magnetic flowmeter (20–25 ft away is usually acceptable)
• Control loop improperly tuned
• Check control loop tuning
• Service valve
• Sticky valve (look for periodic
oscillation of meter output)
• Sensor failure
• Perform the sensor tests
• Analog output loop problem
• Check that the 4 to 20 mA loop matches the digital value Perform
analog output test
9.6
Sensor troubleshooting
This section describes manual tests that can be performed on the sensor to verify the health of
individual components. The tests will require the use of a digital multimeter capable of
measuring conductance in nanoSiemens and an LCR meter. A sensor circuit diagram is shown in
Figure 9-1. The tests described below will check for continuity or isolation of the internal
components of the sensor.
Figure 9-1. Sensor Circuit Diagram (Simplified)
169
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
9.6.1
Sensor adapter
The sensor adapter is the part of the sensor that provides the internal connection feed-through
wiring from the internal sensor components to the socket module connections. The top of the
adapter has 10 pins - four pins for the coils, four pins for the electrodes, and two pins for the
process reference. Each connection point has two pins associated for redundant continuity. See
The best location for testing the sensor components is taking measurements directly on the
feed-through pins. Direct measurement on the pins eliminates the possibility of an erroneous
measurement caused by a bad socket module or remote wiring. The figure below shows the
feed-through pin connections as they relate to the terminal connections described in the tests.
Figure 9-2. Sensor Adapter Feed-through Pins
9.6.2
Socket module
The socket module connects the sensor adapter to the transmitter. There are two versions of
the socket module—one for integral mount transmitters and one for remote mount
If test measurements taken through the socket module show a failure, remove the socket
module and confirm measurements directly on the feed-through pins of the sensor adapter. To
170
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
9.6.3
Installed sensor tests
If a problem with an installed sensor is identified, refer to Table 9-8 on page 172 to assist in trou-
bleshooting the sensor. Disconnect or turn off power to the transmitter before performing any
of the sensor tests. Always check the operation of test equipment before each test.
If possible, take all readings from feed-through pins in the sensor adapter. If the pins in the
sensor adapter are inaccessible, take measurements at the sensor terminal block or through
remote cabling as close to the sensor as possible. Readings taken through remote cabling that is
more than 100 feet (30 meters) in length may provide incorrect or inconclusive information and
should be avoided.
The expected values in the test below assume the measurements have been taken directly at
the pins.
Table 9-8. Sensor Tests and Expected Values
Sensor
Required
Measuring at
Test
location
equipment connections Expected value
Potential cause Corrective action
Installed or
uninstalled
• Open or shorted • Remove and
2Ω ≤ R ≤ 18Ω
A. Sensor coil
Multimeter
Multimeter
1 and 2 = R
17 and 3
coil
replace sensor
• Moisture in
terminal block
• Leaky electrode
• Process behind
liner
3 and case
ground
• Clean terminal
block
• Remove sensor
B. Shields to
case
Installed or
uninstalled
′ < 0.3Ω
17 and case
ground
• Remove sensor
and dry
• Clean terminal
block
• Confirm with
sensor coil test
• Process behind
liner
• Leaky electrode
• Moisture in
terminal block
1 and 3
2 and 3
C. Coil to coil
shield
Installed or
uninstalled
(< 1nS)
(< 1nS)
∞Ω
∞Ω
Multimeter
• Unstable R1 or R2
values confirm
coated electrode
• Shorted
• Remove coating
from sensor wall
• Use bullet-nose
electrodes
electrode
• Electrode not in
contact with
process
• Empty pipe
• Low conductivity
• Leaky electrode
• Process
• Repeat
measurement
• Remove sensor
and complete
tests in Table 9-9
• Connect process
reference ground
per 2.11 Process
D. Electrode to
electrode
shield
LCR (Set to
Resistance
and 120 Hz)
R1 and R2 should be stable
18 and 17 = R1
19 and 17 = R2
Installed
R –R ≤ 300Ω
1
2
reference
ground not
connected
properly
LCR (set to
resistance
and 120 Hz)
Should be stable and same
relative magnitude of R1 and
E. Electrode to
Electrode
18 and 19
Installed
• See Test D above • See Test D above
R2 from Test D
To test the sensor, a multimeter capable of measuring conductance in nanoSiemens is
preferred. Conductance is the reciprocal of resistance.
Or:
172
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
9.6.4
Uninstalled sensor tests
Sensor troubleshooting can also be performed on an uninstalled sensor. If test results from
installed sensor tests are inconclusive, the next step is remove the sensor and perform the tests
electrode head inside the sensor. The measurement electrodes, 18 and 19, are on opposite
sides in the inside diameter of the sensor. If applicable, the third process reference electrode is
between the two measurement electrodes.
The expected values in the test below assume the measurements have been taken directly at
the pins.
Table 9-9. Uninstalled Sensor Tests and Expected Values
Sensor
location
Required
equipment connections
Measuring at
Expected
value
Test
Potential cause
Corrective action
• Shorted electrode • Replace sensor
A. Terminal to
front
Uninstalled Multimeter
Uninstalled Multimeter
Uninstalled Multimeter
18 and electrode 18(1)
19 and electrode 19(1)
• Open electrode
• Coated electrode
• Remove coating
from sensor wall
≤ 1 Ω
electrode
• Shorted electrode • Replace sensor
B. Terminal to
back electrode
• Open electrode
• Coated electrode
• Remove coating
from sensor wall
≤ 1 Ω
• Shorted electrode • Replace sensor
C. Terminal to
reference
electrode
17 and process
• Open electrode
• Coated electrode
• Remove coating
from sensor wall
≤ 0.3 Ω
reference electrode(2)
• Moisture in
terminal block
• Leaky electrode
• Process behind
liner
• Clean terminal
block
• Replace terminal
block
D. Terminal to
case ground
Uninstalled Multimeter
Uninstalled Multimeter
Uninstalled Multimeter
17 and safety ground
≤ 0.3 Ω
• Replace sensor
• Shorted electrode • Replace sensor
• Leaky electrode
• Moisture in
• Clean terminal
block
• Replace terminal
block
18 and 17
(<1 nS)
∞Ω
∞Ω
∞Ω
terminal block
E. Electrode to
electrode
shield
• Shorted electrode • Replace sensor
• Leaky electrode
• Moisture in
• Clean terminal
block
• Replace terminal
block
19 and 17
(<1 nS)
(<1 nS)
terminal block
• Process in coil
housing
• Moisture in
terminal block
• Replace sensor
• Clean terminal
block
• Replace terminal
block
F. Electrode
shield to coil
17 and 1
1. When the connection head is in the vertical upright position and the flow arrow (see Figure 2-4 on page 10) on the connection head flange points to the
right, the front of the meter will be facing towards you. Electrode 18 is on the front of the meter. If you cannot determine the front of the meter, measure
both electrodes. One electrode should result in an open reading, while the other electrode should be less than 0.3 ohm.
2. Only valid if the sensor has a process reference electrode.
173
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
9.7
Technical support
Email addresses:
Worldwide: [email protected]
Asia-Pacific: [email protected]
Middle East and Africa: [email protected]
North and South America
United States 800-522-6277
Europe and Middle East
Asia Pacific
U.K.
0870 240 1978
Australia
800 158 727
Canada
+1 303-527-5200
+41 (0) 41 7686 111
+54 11 4837 7000
+55 15 3238 3677
+58 26 1731 3446
The Netherlands
France
+31 (0) 318 495 555 New Zealand
099 128 804
Mexico
0800 917 901
0800 182 5347
8008 77334
India
800 440 1468
888 550 2682
+86 21 2892 9000
+81 3 5769 6803
+82 2 3438 4600
+65 6 777 8211
001 800 441 6426
800 814 008
Argentina
Brazil
Germany
Italy
Pakistan
China
Venezuela
Central & Eastern
Russia/CIS
Egypt
+41 (0) 41 7686 111 Japan
+7 495 981 9811
0800 000 0015
800 70101
South Korea
Singapore
Thailand
Malaysia
Oman
Qatar
431 0044
Kuwait
663 299 01
South Africa
Saudi Arabia
UAE
800 991 390
800 844 9564
800 0444 0684
174
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Section 9: Troubleshooting
August 2015
9.8
Service
To expedite the return process outside the United States, contact the nearest Rosemount repre-
sentative.
Within the United States and Canada, call the North American Response Center using the
800-654-RSMT (7768) toll-free number. The Response Center, available 24 hours a day, will
assist you with any needed information or materials.
The center will ask for product, model, and serial numbers and will provide a Return Material
Authorization (RMA) number. The center will also ask for the name of the process material to
which the product was last exposed.
Mishandling products exposed to a hazardous substance may result in death or serious injury. If
the product being returned was exposed to a hazardous substance as defined by OSHA, a copy
of the required Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each hazardous substance identified must
be included with the returned goods.
The North American Response Center will detail the additional information and procedures
necessary to return goods exposed to hazardous substances.
175
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
August 2015
Appendix A
Specifications and Reference
Data
Rosemount 8732EM Transmitter specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 177
Rosemount 8705-M Flanged Sensor specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 188
Rosemount 8711-M/L Wafer Sensor specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 194
Rosemount 8721 Hygienic (Sanitary) Sensor specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 198
A.1
Rosemount 8732EM Transmitter specifications
A.1.1
Functional specifications
Sensor compatibility
Compatible with Rosemount 8705, 8711, and 8721 sensors. Compatible with AC and DC
powered sensors of other manufacturers.
Transmitter coil drive current
500mA
Flow rate range
Capable of processing signals from fluids that are traveling between 0.04 and 39 ft/s (0.01 to 12
m/s) for both forward and reverse flow in all sensor sizes. Full scale continuously adjustable
between –39 and 39 ft/s (–12 to 12 m/s).
Conductivity limits
Process liquid must have a conductivity of 5 microSiemens/cm (5 micromhos/cm) or greater.
Power supply
90 - 250VAC, 50/60Hz or 12 - 42VDC
Specifications and Reference Data
177
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
August 2015
Line power fuses
90-250VAC systems
1A, 250V, I2t ≥ 1.5 A2s Rating, Fast Acting
Bussman AGC-1, Littelfuse 31201.5HXP
12-42VDC systems
3 Amp, 250V, I2t ≥ 14 A2s Rating, Fast Acting
Bel Fuse 3AG 3-R, Littelfuse 312003P, Schurter 0034.5135
Power consumption
15W maximum - DC
40VA maximum - AC
Switch-on current
AC: Maximum 35.7A (< 5ms) at 250VAC
DC: Maximum 42A (< 5ms) at 42VDC
AC power supply requirements
Units powered by 90 - 250VAC have the following power requirements.
Figure A-1. AC Current Requirements
178
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
Figure A-2. Apparent Power
DC supply current requirements
Units powered by 12VDC power supply may draw up to 1.2A of current steady state.
Figure A-3. DC Current Requirements
Ambient temperature limits
Operating
–40 to 140 °F (–40 to 60 °C) without local operator interface
–4 to 140 °F (–20 to 60 °C) with local operator interface
The Local Operator Interface (LOI) will not display at temperatures below -20°C
Specifications and Reference Data
179
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
August 2015
Storage
–40 to 185 °F (–40 to 85 °C) without local operator interface
–22 to 176 °F (–30 to 80 °C) with local operator interface(1)
Humidity limits
0–95% RH to 140 °F (60 °C)
Altitude
2000 meters maximum
Enclosure rating
Type 4X, IEC 60529, IP66 (transmitter)
Transient protection rating
Built in transient protection that conforms to:
IEC 61000-4-4 for burst currents
IEC 61000-4-5 for surge currents.
IEC 611185-2.2000, Class 3 up to 2kV and up to 2kA protection.
Turn-on time
Five minutes to rated accuracy from power up
Five seconds from power interruption
Start-up time
50ms from zero flow
Low flow cut-off
Adjustable between 0.01 and 38.37 ft/s (0.003 and 11.7 m/s). Below selected value, output is
driven to the zero flow rate signal level.
Overrange capability
Signal output will remain linear until 110% of upper range value or 44 ft/s (13 m/s). The signal
output will remain constant above these values. Out of range message displayed on LOI and the
Field Communicator.
Damping
Adjustable between 0 and 256 seconds
180
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
A.1.2
Advanced diagnostics capabilities
Basic
Self test
Transmitter faults
Analog output test
Pulse output test
Tunable empty pipe
Reverse flow
Coil circuit fault
Electronics temperature
Process diagnostics (DA1)
Ground/wiring fault
High process noise
Electrode coating diagnostic
Smart meter verification (DA2)
SMART™Meter Verification (continuous or on-demand)
4-20mA loop verification
A.1.3
Output signals
Analog output adjustment(1)
4–20mA, switch-selectable as internally or externally powered.
Analog loop load limitations
Internally powered 24VDC max, 500 ohms max loop resistance
Externally powered 10.8 - 30VDC max.
Loop resistance is determined by the voltage level of the external power supply at the
transmitter terminals.
(1) For transmitters with intrinsically safe outputs (option code B), power must be supplied externally.
Specifications and Reference Data
181
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
August 2015
Figure A-4. Analog Loop Load Limitations
600
Operating
Region
0
10.8
30
Power Supply (Volts)
R
V
=
=
31.25 (V – 10.8)
Power Supply Voltage (Volts)
Maximum Loop Resistance (Ohms)
max
ps
=
ps
R
max
The analog output is automatically scaled to provide 4mA at lower range value and 20mA at
upper range value. Full scale continuously adjustable between -39 and 39 ft/s (-12 to 12 m/sec),
1 ft/s (0.3 m/s) minimum span.
HART Communications is a digital flow signal. The digital signal is superimposed on the 4–
20mA signal and is available for the control system interface. A minimum of 250 Ohms loop
resistance is required for HART communications.
Scalable pulse frequency adjustment(1)(2)
0-10,000Hz, switch-selectable as internally or externally powered. Pulse value can be set to
equal desired volume in selected engineering units. Pulse width adjustable from 0.1 to 650 ms.
Internally powered: Outputs up to 12VDC
Externally powered: Input 5 - 28VDC
Output testing
Analog output test(3)
Transmitter may be commanded to supply a specified current between 3.5 and 23mA.
Pulse output test(4)
Transmitter may be commanded to supply a specified frequency between 1 and 10,000Hz.
Optional discrete output function (AX option)
Externally powered at 5 - 28VDC, 240mA max, solid state switch closure to indicate either:
Reverse flow
Activates switch closure output when reverse flow is detected.
(1) For transmitters with intrinsically safe outputs (option code B), power must be supplied externally.
(2) For transmitters with intrinsically safe outputs (option code B), frequency range is limited to 0-5000Hz.
(3) For transmitters with intrinsically safe outputs (option code B), power must be supplied externally.
(4) For transmitters with intrinsically safe outputs (option code B), power must be supplied externally.
182
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
Zero flow
Activates switch closure output when flow goes to 0 ft/s or below low flow cutoff.
Empty pipe
Activates switch closure output when an empty pipe condition is detected.
Transmitter faults
Activates switch closure output when a transmitter fault is detected.
Flow limit 1, Flow limit 2
Activates switch closure output when the transmitter measures a flow rate that meets the
conditions established for this alert. There are two independent flow limit alerts that can be
configured as discrete outputs.
Totalizer limit
Activates switch closure output when the transmitter measures a total flow that meets the
conditions established for this alert.
Diagnostic status
Activates switch closure output when the transmitter detects a condition that meets the
configured criteria of this output.
Optional discrete input function (AX option)
Externally powered at 5 - 28VDC, 1.4 - 20mA to activate switch closure to indicate either:
Net total reset
Resets the net totalizer value to zero.
Positive zero return (PZR)
Forces outputs of the transmitter to zero flow.
Security lockout
Security lockout switch on the electronics board can be set to deactivate all LOI and HART-based
communicator functions to protect configuration variables from unwanted or accidental
change.
LOI lockout
The display can be manually locked to prevent unintentional configuration changes. The display
lock can be activated through a HART® communication device, or by holding the UP arrow for 3
seconds and then following the on-screen instructions. When the display lock is activated, a lock
symbol will appear in the lower right hand corner of the display. To deactivate the display lock,
hold the UP arrow for 3 seconds and follow the on-screen instructions.
Specifications and Reference Data
183
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
August 2015
Display auto lock can be configured from the LOI with the following settings: OFF, 1 Minute, or
10 Minutes
A.1.4
A.1.5
Sensor compensation
Rosemount sensors are calibrated in a flow lab at the factory and are assigned a calibration
number. The calibration number must be entered into the transmitter, enabling interchange-
ability of sensors without calculations or a compromise in standard accuracy.
8732EM transmitters and other manufacturers’ sensors can be calibrated at known process
conditions or at the Rosemount NIST-Traceable Flow Facility. Transmitters calibrated on site
require a two-step procedure to match a known flow rate. This procedure can be found in the
operations manual.
Performance specifications
System specifications are given using the frequency output and with the unit at reference
conditions.
Accuracy
Includes the combined effects of linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability.
Rosemount 8705-M Sensor
Standard system accuracy is 0.25% of rate 1.0 mm/sec from 0.04 to 6 ft/s (0.01 to 2 m/s);
above 6 ft/s (2 m/s), the system has an accuracy of 0.25% of rate 1.5 mm/sec.
Optional high accuracy is 0.15% of rate 1.0 mm/sec from 0.04 to 13 ft/s (0.01 to 4 m/s);
above 13 ft/s (4 m/s), the system has an accuracy of 0.18% of rate.(1)
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.25%
0.15%
0.5
0
27
(8)
40
(12)
3
(1)
6
(2)
20
(6)
33
(10)
0
13
(4)
Velocitty in ft/s (m/s)
(1) For sensor sizes greater than 12 in. (300 mm) the high accuracy is 0.25% of rate from 3 to 39 ft/sec (1 to 12 m/sec).
184
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
Rosemount 8711-M/L Sensor
Standard system accuracy is 0.25% of rate 2.0 mm/sec from 0.04 to 39 ft/s (0.01 to 12 m/s).
Optional high accuracy is 0.15% of rate 1.0 mm/sec from 0.04 to 13 ft/s (0.01 to 4 m/s);
above 13 ft/s (4 m/s), the system has an accuracy of 0.18% of rate.
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.25%
0.15%
0.5
0
27
(8)
40
(12)
3
(1)
6
(2)
20
(6)
33
(10)
0
13
(4)
Velocityy in ft/s (m/s)
Rosemount 8721 Sensor
Standard system accuracy is 0.5% of rate from 1 to 39 ft/s (0.3 to 12 m/s); between 0.04 and
1.0 ft/s (0.01 and 0.3 m/s), the system has an accuracy of 0.005 ft/s (0.0015 m/s).
Optional high accuracy is 0.25% of rate from 3 to 39 ft/s (1 to 12 m/s).
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.25%
0.5%
0.5
0
27
(8)
40
(12)
3
(1)
6
(2)
20
(6)
33
(10)
0
13
(4)
Velocitty in ft/s (m/s)
Other manufacturers’ sensors
When calibrated in the Rosemount Flow Facility, system accuracies as good as 0.5% of rate can
be attained.
There is no accuracy specification for other manufacturers’ sensors calibrated in the process
line.
Specifications and Reference Data
185
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
August 2015
A.1.6
Analog output effects
Analog output has the same accuracy as frequency output plus an additional 4μA at room
temperature.
Repeatability
0.1% of reading
Response time (analog output)
20 ms max response time to step change in input
Stability
0.1% of rate over six months
Ambient temperature effect
0.25% change over operating temperature range
A.1.7
Physical specifications
Materials of construction
Standard housing
Low copper aluminum
Type 4X and IEC 60529 IP66
Paint
Polyurethane coat (1.3 to 5 mils thick)
Optional housing
316/316L unpainted, option code SH
Type 4X and IEC 60529 IP66
Cover gasket
Buna-N
Electrical connections
Conduit entries: 1/2-in. NPT or M20.
Terminal block screws: 6-32 (No. 6) suitable for up to 14 AWG wire.
Safety grounding screws: external stainless assembly, M5; internal 8-32 (No. 8)
186
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
Vibration rating
3G per IEC 61298
Dimensions
Weight
Aluminum - approximately 7 lbs. (3.2 kg).
316 stainless steel - approximately 23 lbs. (10.5 kg).
Add 1 pound (0.5 kg) for display option code M4 or M5.
A.1.8
F0875 Low Power Software Option
Available with DC power supply (2) and intrinsically safe outputs (B) only. This software option
lowers the coil drive current from 500mA to 75mA in order to conserve power for applications
where battery packs or solar panels are the primary power source. The coils are still driven in a
continuous manner, optimizing measurement performance. Power consumption of the
transmitter is reduced to approximately 2W. Use of the analog output results in a maximum of
1W of additional power consumption under a high alarm condition (23.5mA) and 24VDC
supply. Power consumption of the output loop can be minimized by utilizing the pulse output or
pulling information off of the HART signal. Both the pulse loop and the analog loop require
external power source to be applied. Flow performance reference accuracy is 1.0% of rate.
To ensure the sensor is calibrated with a low power calibration number, Option Code D3 has
been established. This code must appear in the transmitter and sensor model number. Sample
model numbers for lower power are:
8732EMT2B1N5M4DA1DA2D3F0875
8705THA020C7M0N5B3D3
Specifications and Reference Data
187
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
August 2015
A.2
Rosemount 8705-M Flanged Sensor specifications
A.2.1
Functional specifications
Service
Conductive liquids and slurries
Line sizes
1/2–in. to 36-in. (15 mm to 900 mm) for Rosemount 8705
Sensor coil resistance
7 - 16 Ω
Interchangeability
Rosemount 8705-M sensors are interchangeable with 8732EM transmitters. System accuracy is
maintained regardless of line size or optional features. Each sensor nameplate has a 16-digit
calibration number that can be entered into a transmitter through the Local Operator Interface
(LOI) or the Field Communicator.
Upper range limit
39.37 ft/s (12 m/s)
Process temperature limits
PTFE lining
–20 to 350 °F (–29 to 177 °C)
ETFE lining
–20 to 300 °F (–29 to 149 °C)
PFA lining
-20 to 350 °F (-29 to 177 °C)
188
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
Polyurethane lining
0 to 140 °F (–18 to 60 °C)
Neoprene lining
0 to 176 °F (–18 to 80 °C)
Linatex lining
0 to 158 °F (–18 to 70 °C)
Adiprene lining
0 to 200 °F (–18 to 93 °C)
Ambient temperature limits
–20 to 140 °F (–29 to 60 °C)
Pressure limits
Vacuum limits
PTFE lining
Full vacuum to 350 °F (177 °C) through 4-in. (100 mm) line sizes. Consult factory for vacuum
applications with line sizes of 6 in. (150 mm) or larger.
All other standard sensor lining materials
Full vacuum to maximum material temperature limits for all available line sizes.
Submergence protection (IP68)
The remote mount 8705-M sensor is rated IP68 for submergence to a depth of 33 ft. (10 m) for a
period of 48 hours. IP68 rating requires the transmitter must be remote mount. Installer must
use IP68 approved cable glands, conduit connections, and/or conduit plugs. For more details on
proper installation techniques for IP68 submersible application, reference Rosemount Technical
Note 00840-0100-4750 available on www.rosemount.com.
Conductivity limits
Process liquid must have a minimum conductivity of 5 microSiemens/cm (5 micromhos/cm) or
greater.
Specifications and Reference Data
189
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
August 2015
Table A-1. Temperature vs. Pressure Limits(1)
Sensor temperature vs. pressure limits for ASME B16.5 class flanges (1/2-in. to 36-in. line
sizes)(2)
Pressure
@ -20 to 100 °F
(-29 to 38 °C)
@ 200 °F
(93 °C)
@ 300 °F
(149 °C)
@ 350 °F
(177 °C)
Flange material Flange rating
Class 150
Class 300
285 psi
740 psi
260 psi
675 psi
230 psi
655 psi
215 psi
645 psi
650 psi
1292 psi
1935 psi
3225 psi
5375 psi
190 psi
500 psi
650 psi
997 psi
1497 psi
2495 psi
4160 psi
Class 600(3)
1000 psi
1480 psi
2220 psi
3705 psi
6170 psi
275 psi
800 psi
700 psi
Carbon Steel
Class 600(4)
Class 900
1350 psi
2025 psi
3375 psi
5625 psi
235 psi
1315 psi
1970 psi
3280 psi
5470 psi
205 psi
Class 1500
Class 2500
Class 150
Class 300
720 psi
600 psi
530 psi
Class 600 (5)
Class 600 (6)
Class 900
1000 psi
1440 psi
2160 psi
3600 psi
6000 psi
800 psi
700 psi
304 Stainless
Steel
1200 psi
1800 psi
3000 psi
5000 psi
1055 psi
1585 psi
2640 psi
4400 psi
Class 1500
Class 2500
1. Liner temperature limits must also be considered.
2. 30-in. and 36-in. AWWA C207 Class D rated to 150 psi at atmospheric temperature.
3. Option Code C6.
4. Option Code C7.
5. Option Code S6.
6. Option Code S7.
Table A-2. Temperature vs. Pressure Limits(1)
Sensor temperature vs. pressure limits for AS2129 Table D and E flanges (4-in. to 24-in. line sizes)
Pressure
@ -29 to 50 °C
(-20 to 122 °F)
@ 100 °C
(212 °F)
@ 150 °C
(302 °F)
@ 200 °C
(392 °F)
Flange material
Flange rating
D
E
101.6 psi
203.1 psi
101.6 psi
203.1 psi
101.6 psi
203.1 psi
94.3 psi
Carbon Steel
188.6 psi
1. Liner temperature limits must also be considered.
Table A-3. Temperature vs. Pressure Limits(1)
Sensor temperature vs. pressure limits for EN 1092-1 flanges (15 mm to 600 mm line sizes)
Pressure
@ -29 to 50 °C
(-20 to 122 °F)
@ 100 °C
(212 °F)
@ 150°C
(302 °F)
@ 175°C
(347 °F)
Flange material
Flange rating
PN 10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 40
10 bar
16 bar
25 bar
40 bar
10 bar
16 bar
25 bar
40 bar
9.7 bar
15.6 bar
24.4 bar
39.1 bar
9.5 bar
15.3 bar
24.0 bar
38.5 bar
Carbon Steel
190
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
Table A-3. Temperature vs. Pressure Limits(1) (continued)
Sensor temperature vs. pressure limits for EN 1092-1 flanges (15 mm to 600 mm line sizes)
Pressure
@ -29 to 50 °C
(-20 to 122 °F)
@ 100 °C
(212 °F)
@ 150°C
(302 °F)
@ 175°C
(347 °F)
Flange material
Flange rating
PN 10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 40
9.1 bar
14.7 bar
23 bar
7.5 bar
12.1 bar
18.9 bar
30.3 bar
6.8 bar
11.0 bar
17.2 bar
27.5 bar
6.5 bar
10.6 bar
16.6 bar
26.5 bar
304 Stainless Steel
36.8 bar
1. Liner temperature limits must also be considered.
A.2.2
Physical specifications
Non-wetted materials
Sensor pipe
Type 304/304L SST or Type 316/316L SST
Flanges
Carbon steel, Type 304/304L SST, or Type 316/316L SST
Coil housing
Rolled carbon steel
Paint
Polyurethane coat (1.3 to 5 mils thick)
Optional coil housing
316/316L unpainted, option code SH
Process wetted materials
Lining
PTFE, ETFE, PFA, Polyurethane, Neoprene, Linatex, Adiprene, PFA+
Electrodes
316L SST, Nickel Alloy 276 (UNS N10276), Tantalum, 80% Platinum-20% Iridium, Titanium
Flat-faced flanges
Flat-faced flanges are manufactured with full-face liners. Available in Neoprene and Linatex only.
Specifications and Reference Data
191
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
August 2015
Process connections
ASME B16.5
1/2-in. to 24-in. (Class 150, 300, 600(1)
1-in. to 12-in. (Class 900)(2)
)
ASME B16.47
30-in. to 36-in. (Class 150)
30-in. to 36-in. (Class 300)
AWWA C207 Class D
30-in. and 36-in.
MSS SP44
30-in. to 36-in. (Class 150)
EN 1092-1
200 mm to 900 mm (8-in. to 36-in.) PN10
100 mm to 900 mm (4 -in. to 36-in.) PN16
200 mm to 900 mm (8-in. to 36-in.) PN 25
15 mm to 900 mm (1/2-in. to 36-in.) PN40
AS2129
15 mm to 900 mm (1/2-in. to 36-in.) Table D and E
AS4087
50 mm to 600 mm (2-in. to 24-in.) PN16, PN21, PN35
JIS B2220
15 mm to 200 mm (1/2-in. to 8-in.) 10K, 20K, 40K
(1) For PTFE and ETFE, maximum working pressure is derated to 1000 psig.
(2) For Class 900 and higher flange ratings, liner selection is limited to resilient liners.
192
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
Electrical connections
Conduit entries: 1/2 in. NPT or M20.
Terminal block screws: 6-32 (No. 6) suitable for up to 14 AWG wire.
Safety grounding screws: external stainless assembly, M5; internal 8-32 (No. 8)
Process reference electrode (optional)
A process reference electrode can be installed similarly to the measurement electrodes through
the sensor lining on 8705 sensors. It will be made of the same material as the measurement
electrodes.
Grounding rings (optional)
Grounding rings can be installed between the flange and the sensor face on both ends of the
sensor. Single ground rings can be installed on either end of the sensor. They have an I.D. slightly
larger than the sensor I.D. and an external tab to attach ground wiring. Grounding rings are
available in 316L SST, Nickel Alloy 276 (UNS N10276), Titanium, and Tantalum. See Product
Lining protectors (optional)
Lining protectors can be installed between the flange and the sensor face on both ends of the
sensor. The leading edge of lining material is protected by the lining protector; lining protectors
cannot be removed once they are installed. Lining protectors are available in 316L SST, Nickel
Alloy 276 (UNS N10276), and Titanium. See Product Data Sheet.
Dimensions
See the Product Data Sheet.
Weight
See the Product Data Sheet.
Specifications and Reference Data
193
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
August 2015
A.3
Rosemount 8711-M/L Wafer Sensor specifications
A.3.1
Functional specifications
Service
Conductive liquids and slurries
Line sizes
1.5-in. to 8-in. (4 mm to 200 mm)
Sensor coil resistance
10 - 18 Ω
Interchangeability
Rosemount 8711-M/L sensors are interchangeable with 8732EM transmitter. System accuracy is
maintained regardless of line size or optional features. Each sensor nameplate has a sixteen-digit
calibration number that can be entered into a transmitter through the Local Operator Interface
(LOI) or the Field Communicator.
Upper range limit
39.37 ft/s (12 m/s)
Process temperature limits
ETFE lining
-20 to 300 °F (–29 to 149 °C)
PTFE lining
-20 to 350 °F (-29 to 177 °C)
PFA Lining
-20 to 200 °F (-29 to 93 °C)
194
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
Ambient temperature limits
–20 to 140 °F (–29 to 60 °C)
Maximum safe working pressure at 100 °F (38 °C)
ETFE lining
Full vacuum to 740 psi (5.1 MPa)
PTFE lining
Full vacuum through 4-in. (100 mm) line sizes. Consult factory for vacuum applications with line
sizes of 6-in. (1450 mm) or larger.
PFA lining
Full vacuum to 285 psi (1.96 MPa)
Submergence protection (IP68)
The remote mount 8711-M/L sensor is rated IP68 for submergence to a depth of 33 ft. (10 m) for
a period of 48 hours. IP68 rating requires the transmitter must be remote mount. Installer must
use IP68 approved cable glands, conduit connections, and/or conduit plugs. For more details on
proper installation techniques for IP68 submersible application, reference Rosemount Technical
Note 00840-0100-4750 available on www.rosemount.com.
Conductivity limits
Process liquid must have a minimum conductivity of 5 microSiemens/cm (5 micromhos/cm) or
greater for 8711.
A.3.2
Physical specifications
Non-wetted materials
Sensor body
303 SST
CF3M or CF8M
Type 304/304L
Coil housing
Rolled carbon steel
Paint
Polyurethane coat (1.3 to 5 mils thick)
Specifications and Reference Data
195
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
August 2015
Process-wetted materials
Lining
ETFE, PTFE
Electrodes
316L SST, Nickel Alloy 276 (UNS N10276), Tantalum, 80% Platinum—20% Iridium, Titanium
Process connections
Mounts between these flange configurations
ASME B16.5: Class 150, 300
EN 1092-1: PN10, PN16, PN25, PN40
JIS B2220: 10K, 20K,
AS4087: PN16, PN21, PN35
Studs, nuts, and washers
MK2–Carbon Steel
ASME B16.5
Studs, full thread: CS, ASTM A193, Grade B7
Hex nuts: ASTM A194 Grade 2H;
Flat washers: CS, Type A, Series N, SAE per ANSI B18.2.1
All items clear, chromate zinc-plated
EN 1092-1
Studs, full thread: CS, ASTM A193, Grade B7
Hex nuts: ASTM A194 Grade 2H; DIN 934 H = D
Flat washers: CS, DIN 125
All items yellow zinc-plated
196
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
MK3–316 SST
ASME B16.5
Studs, full thread: ASTM A193, Grade B8M Class 1
Hex nuts: ASTM A194 Grade 8M;
Flat washers: 316 SST, Type A, Series N, SAE per ANSI B18.2.1
EN 1092-1
Studs, full thread: ASTM A193, Grade B8M Class 1
Hex nuts: ASTM A194 Grade 8M; DIN 934 H = D
Flat washers: 316 SST, DIN 125
Electrical connections
Conduit entries: 1/2 in. NPT or M20 standard
Terminal block screws: 6-32 (No. 6) suitable for up to 14 AWG wire
Safety grounding screws: external stainless assembly, M5; internal 8-32 (No. 8)
Process reference electrode (optional)
A process reference electrode can be installed similarly to the measurement electrodes through
the sensor lining. It will be made of the same material as the measurement electrodes.
Grounding rings (optional)
Grounding rings can be installed between the flange and the sensor face on both ends of the
sensor. They have an I.D. slightly smaller than the sensor I.D. and an external tab to attach
ground wiring. Grounding rings are available in 316L SST, Nickel Alloy 276 (UNS N10276),
titanium, and tantalum. See Product Data Sheet.
Dimensions
See the Product Data Sheet.
Weight
See the Product Data Sheet.
Specifications and Reference Data
197
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
August 2015
A.4
Rosemount 8721 Hygienic (Sanitary) Sensor
specifications
A.4.1
Functional specifications
Service
Conductive liquids and slurries
Line sizes
1/2-in. to 4-in. (15 mm to100 mm)
Sensor coil resistance
5 -10Ω
Interchangeability
The Rosemount 8721 sensors are interchangeable with Rosemount 8732EM transmitters.
System accuracy is maintained regardless of line size or optional features.
Each sensor label has a 16 digit calibration number that can be entered into the transmitter
through the Local Operator Interface (LOI) or the Field Communicator.
Conductivity limits
Process liquid must have a minimum conductivity of 5 microSiemens/cm (5 micromhos/cm) or
greater. Excludes the effect of interconnecting cable length in remote mount transmitter
installations.
Flow rate range
Capable of processing signals from fluids that are traveling between 0.04 and 39 ft/s (0.01 to 12
m/s) for both forward and reverse flow in all sensor sizes. Full scale continuously adjustable
between –39 and 39 ft/s (–12 to 12 m/s).
198
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
Sensor ambient temperature limits
14 to 140 °F (–15 to 60 °C)
Process temperature limits
PFA lining
-20 to 350 °F (-29 to 177 °C)
Table A-4. Pressure limits
Line size
in. (mm)
Max working
pressure
CE Mark max. working
pressure
1/2 (15)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
210 psi (14.5 bar)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
240 psi (16.5 bar)
198 psi (13.7 bar)
148 psi (10.2 bar)
1 (25)
11/2 (40)
2 (50)
21/2 (65)
3 (80)
4 (100)
Vacuum limits
Full vacuum at maximum lining material temperature; consult factory.
Submergence protection (IP68)
period of 48 hours. IP68 rating requires the transmitter must be remote mount. Installer must
use IP68 approved cable glands, conduit connections, and/or conduit plugs. For more details on
proper installation techniques for IP68 submersible application, reference Rosemount Technical
Note 00840-0100-4750 available on www.rosemount.com.
A.4.2
Physical specifications
Mounting
Integrally mounted transmitters are factory-wired and do not require interconnecting cables.
The transmitter can rotate in 90° increments. Remote mounted transmitters require only a
single conduit connection to the sensor.
Non-wetted materials
Sensor
304 Stainless Steel (wrapper), 304 Stainless Steel (pipe)
Terminal junction box
Low copper aluminum
Optional: 304 Stainless Steel
Specifications and Reference Data
199
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
August 2015
Weight
Table A-5. 8721 Sensor weight
Line size
008721-0350 Tri
in. (mm)
Sensor only
Clamp fitting (each)
1/2 (15)
4.84 lbs (2.20 kg)
4.52 lbs (2.05 kg)
5.52 lbs (2.51 kg)
6.78 lbs (3.08 kg)
8.79 lbs (4.00 kg)
13.26 lbs (6.03 kg)
21.04 lbs (9.56 kg)
0.58 lbs (0.263 kg)
0.68 lbs (0.309 kg)
0.88 lbs (0.400 kg)
1.30 lbs (0.591 kg)
1.66 lbs (0.727 kg)
2.22 lbs (1.01 kg)
3.28 lbs (1.49 kg)
1 (25)
11/2 (40)
2 (50)
21/2 (65)
3 (80)
4 (100)
Aluminum remote junction box
Approximately 1 lb. (0.45 kg)
Paint - Polyurethane (1.3 to 5 mils)
SST remote junction box
Approximately 2.5 lbs. (1.13 kg)
Unpainted
Process wetted materials (sensor)
Liner
PFA with Ra < 32μ in. (0.81 μm)
Electrodes
316L SST with Ra < 15μ in. (0.38 μm)
Nickel Alloy 276 (UNS N10276) with Ra < 15μ in. (0.38 μm)
80% Platinum-20% Iridium with Ra < 15μ in. (0.38 μm)
Process connections
The Rosemount 8721 sanitary sensor is designed using a standard IDF fitting as the basis for
providing a flexible, hygienic interface for a variety of process connections. The Rosemount
8721 Sensor has the threaded or “male” end of the IDF fitting on the ends of the base sensor.
The sensor can be directly connected with user supplied IDF fittings and gaskets. If other process
connections are needed, the IDF fittings and gaskets can be provided and welded directly into
the sanitary process tubing, or can be supplied with adapters to standard Tri Clamp process
connections. All connections are PED compliant for group 2 fluids.
Tri Clamp Sanitary Coupling
IDF Sanitary Coupling (screw type)
200
Specifications and Reference Data
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
IDF specification per BS4825 part 4
ANSI Weld Nipple
DIN 11850 Weld Nipple
DIN 11851 (Imperial and Metric)
DIN 11864-1 form A
DIN 11864-2 form A
SMS 1145
Cherry-Burrell I-Line
Process connection material
316L Stainless Steel with Ra < 32μ in. (0.81μm)
Optional electropolished surface finish with Ra < 15μ in. (0.38μ m)
Process connection gasket material
Silicone
EPDM
Viton®
Electrical connections
Conduit entries: 1/2 in. NPT standard.
Terminal block screws: M3
Safety grounding screws: external stainless assembly, M5; internal 6-32 (No. 6)
Dimensions
See the Product Data Sheet.
Specifications and Reference Data
201
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
August 2015
202
Specifications and Reference Data
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
Appendix B
Product Certifications
B.1
Product certifications
Approvals Document
July 24, 2015
08732-AP01, Rev AF
Rosemount 8700M Magnetic Flowmeter Platform
Order
Code
8732EM
Transmitter Rating
8705M and 8711M/L
Flowtube Rating
Certification
Num ber
Region Agency
USA
FM
-
Ordinary Locations *
Ordinary Location *
3048793
3048793
3048793
70030489
70030489
***
EU
FM Non-Incendive
Class I Div 2; DIP
FM Explosion-Proof
Class I Div 1; DIP
CSA Non-Incendive
Class I Div 2; DIP
CSA Explosion-Proof
Class I Div 1; DIP
FM Non-Incendive with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
Class I Div 2; DIP
FM Explosion-Proof with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
Class I Div 1; DIP
CSA Non-Incendive with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
Class I Div 2; DIP
CSA Explosion-Proof with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
Class I Div 1; DIP
N5
K5
N6
KU
K6
USA
USA
FM
FM
USA &
Canada
CSA
CSA
CSA
USA
Canada
EU
CSA Flameproof, Increased Safety, and Dust. CSA Increased Safety with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes and
Zone 0 & 1
Dust. Zone 0 & 1
ND ATEX Dust
ATEX Dust
DEKRA 14ATEX0071 X
DEKRA 14ATEX0071 X
ATEX Non-Sparking
ATEX Dust
ATEX Flameproof with Increased Safety
ATEX Dust
ATEX Non-Sparking with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
ATEX Dust
ATEX Increased Safety with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
ATEX Dust
N1
K1
EU
EU
DEKRA 14ATEX0071 X
IECEx
NF IECEx Dust
IECEx Non-Sparking
IECEx Dust
Global DEKRA
Global DEKRA
Global DEKRA
DEK14.0031X
IECEx
DEK14.0031X
IECEx
DEK14.0031X
IECEx Non-Sparking with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
IECEx Dust
IECEx Increased Safety with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
IECEx Dust
EAC Non-Sparking with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
EAC Dust
EAC Increased Safety with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
EAC Dust
N7
K7
N8
K8
N2
K2
N9
K9
N3
K3
IECEx Dust
IECEx Flameproof with Increased Safety
IECEx Dust
EAC Non-Sparking
EAC Dust
EAC Flameproof with Increased Safety
EAC Dust
Russia
***
**
***
***
Russia
***
**
INMETRO Non-Sparking
INMETRO Dust
INMETRO Non-Sparking with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
INMETRO Dust
DEKRA -
INMETRO
DEKRA
15.0007 X
DEKRA
15.0007 X
Brazil
INMETRO Flameproof with Increased Safety INMETRO Increased Safety with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
INMETRO Dust
KOSHA Non-Sparking
KOSHA Dust
KOSHA Flameproof with Increased Safety
KOSHA Dust
NEPSI Non-Sparking
NEPSI Dust
NEPSI Flameproof with Increased Safety
NEPSI Dust
DEKRA -
INMETRO
Brazil
INMETRO Dust
KOSHA Non-Sparking with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
KOSHA Dust
KOSHA Increased Safety with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
KOSHA Dust
NEPSI Non-Sparking with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
NEPSI Dust
Korea
Korea
China
China
India
***
***
***
***
NEPSI
NEPSI
PESO
GYJ15.1180X
GYJ15.1180X
P354747/1
NEPSI Increased Safety with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
NEPSI Dust
KN CCOEFlameproof with Increased Safety
CCOEIncreased Safety with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
Complies with only the local country product safety, electromagnetic, pressure and other applicable regulations.
Cannot be used in a classified or zoned hazardous location environment. No ordering code required.
*
Customs Union (Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan)
Planned submittal or in process with Agency.
**
***
203
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
Approvals Document
July 24, 2015
08732-AP01, Rev AF
Approval Markings and Logos
Marking or
Symbol
Symbol
Name
Region
Meaning of Marking or Symbol
CE
European Union
Compliance with all applicable European
Union Directives.
ATEX
European Union
Australia
Compliance with Equipment and Protective
systems intended for use in Potentially
Explosive Atmospheres directive (ATEX)
(94/9/EC)
C-tick
Compliance with Australian applicable
electromagnetic compatibility standards
FM Approved United States
Compliance with the applicable ANSI
standards.
CSA
US = United States
C = Canada
Indicates that the product was tested and has
met the applicable certification requirements
for the noted countries.
Eurasian
Conformity
(EAC)
Eurasian Customs Union Compliance with all of the applicable technical
(Russia, Belarus and
Kazakhstan)
regulations of the EAC Customs Union
EAC
Hazardous
Location
Eurasian Customs Union Compliance with Technical regulation, (TR CU
(Russia, Belarus and
Kazakhstan)
012/2011) – The safety of equipment for use
in explosive environments.
INMETRO
Brazil
Compliance with all of the applicable technical
regulations of Brazil.
NEPSI
KCS
China
Korea
Compliance with all of the applicable technical
regulations of China.
Compliance with all of the applicable technical
regulations of Korea.
Ordinary Location labels will be marked with CE, C-tick, FM, CSA and EAC logos.
204
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
Approvals Document
July 24, 2015
08732-AP01, Rev AF
European Directive Information
A copy of the EC Declaration of Conformity can be found at the end of the Quick Start Guide. The most recent
revision of the EC Declaration of Conformity can be found at www.rosemount.com.
Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) (2004/108/EC)
Transmitter and Flowtube: EN 61326-1: 2013
Transmitters with output code “B” require shielded cable for the 4-20mA output, with shield terminated at the
transmitter.
Low Voltage Directive (LVD) (2006/95/EC)
EN 61010-1: 2010
Ingress Protection Rating for dust and water per EN 60079-0 and EN 60529 – IP66/68 (The IP68 rating only
applies to the flowtube and the remote junction box when the transmitter is remotely mounted. The IP68 rating
does not apply to the transmitter. The IP68 rating is only valid at a depth of 10 meters for 48 hours)
European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) (97/23/EC)
PED Certification requires the “PD” option code.
CE marked models that are ordered without the “PD” option will be marked “Not Complaint to (97/23/EC)”
Mandatory CE-marking with notified body number 0575, for all flowtubes is located on the flowmeter label.
Category I assessed for conformity per module A procedures.
Categories II – III assessed for conformity per module H procedures.
QS Certificate of Assessment
EC No. 4741-2014-CE-HOU-DNV
Module H Conformity Assessment
8705 M Flanged Flowtubes
Line size 40mm to 900mm (1½-in to 36-in)
EN 1092-1 flanges and ASME B16.5 class 150 and ASME B16.5 Class 300 flanges.
Also available in ASME B16.5 Class 600 flanges in limited line sizes.
8711 Wafer Flowtubes
Line size 40mm to 200mm (1½-in to 8-in)
All other Rosemount Flowtubes – line sizes of 25mm (1-in) and less: Sound Engineering Practice (SEP).
Flowtubes that are SEP are outside the scope of PED and cannot be marked for compliance with PED.
205
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
Approvals Document
July 24, 2015
08732-AP01, Rev AF
Certifications
Factory Mutual (FM)
Ordinary Location Certification for FM Approvals
As standard, the transmitter and flowtube have been examined and tested to determine that the design meets
basic electrical, mechanical, and fire protection requirements by FM Approvals, a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) as accredited by the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
8732EM Transmitter
Note: For Intrinsically Safe (IS) 4-20mA and Pulse Outputs on the 8732EM, output code “B” must be selected.
N5
Non-Incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD: T4
Dust-Ignition Proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups EFG: T5
-ꢀꢁƒ&ꢂ”ꢂ7Dꢂ”ꢂꢃꢁƒ&
Enclosure Type 4X, IP66
Install per drawing 08732-2062
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1. Units marked with “Warning: Electrostatic Charging Hazard” may either use non-conductive paint thicker
than 0.2 mm or non-metallic labeling. Precautions shall be taken to avoid ignition due to electrostatic
charge on the enclosure.
2. The intrinsically safe 4-20mA and pulse output cannot withstand the 500V isolation test due to integral
transient protection. This must be taken into consideration upon installation.
3. Conduit entries must be installed to maintain the enclosure ingress rating of IP66.
4. Unused conduit entries must use either used the Rosemount-supplied blanking plugs, or blanking plugs
certified in accordance with the protection type.
K5
Explosion-Proof for Class I Division 1, Groups CD: T6
Non-Incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD: T4
Dust-Ignition Proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups EFG: T5
-ꢀꢁƒ&ꢂ”ꢂ7Dꢂ”ꢂꢃꢁƒ&
Enclosure Type 4X, IP66
Install per drawing 08732-2062
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1. Units marked with “Warning: Electrostatic Charging Hazard” may either use non-conductive paint thicker
than 0.2 mm or non-metallic labeling. Precautions shall be taken to avoid ignition due to electrostatic
charge on the enclosure.
2. The intrinsically safe 4-20mA and pulse output cannot withstand the 500V isolation test due to integral
transient protection. This must be taken into consideration upon installation.
3. Conduit entries must be installed to maintain the enclosure ingress rating of IP66.
4. Unused conduit entries must use either used the Rosemount-supplied blanking plugs, or blanking plugs
certified in accordance with the protection type.
206
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
Approvals Document
July 24, 2015
08732-AP01, Rev AF
8705-M and 8711-M/L Flowtube
Note: When used in hazardous (classified) locations:
The 8705-M and 8711-M/L may only be used with a certified 8732EM transmitter.
N5
Non-Incendive with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
for Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD: T3…T5
Dust-Ignition Proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups EFG: T2…T5
-ꢄꢅƒ&ꢂ”ꢂ7Dꢂ”ꢂꢃꢁƒ&
Enclosure Type 4X, IP66/68 (IP68 remote mount only)
Install per drawing 08732-2062
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1. Units marked with “Warning: Electrostatic Charging Hazard” may either use non-conductive paint thicker
than 0.2 mm or non-metallic labeling. Precautions shall be taken to avoid ignition due to electrostatic
charge on the enclosure.
2. If used with flammable process fluid, the electrode circuit must be installed as intrinsically safe (Ex ia).
3. Conduit entries must be installed to maintain a minimum enclosure ingress rating of IP66.
4. Unused conduit entries must use either used the Rosemount-supplied blanking plugs, or blanking plugs
certified in accordance with the protection type.
K5
Explosion-Proof with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
for Class I Division 1, Groups CD: T3…T6
Non-Incendive with Intrinsically Safe Electrodes
for Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD: T3…T5
Dust-Ignition Proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups EFG: T2…T5
-ꢄꢅƒ&ꢂ”ꢂ7Dꢂ”ꢂꢃꢁƒ&
Enclosure Type 4X, IP66/68 (IP68 remote mount only)
Install per drawing 08732-2062
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1. Units marked with “Warning: Electrostatic Charging Hazard” may either use non-conductive paint thicker
than 0.2 mm or non-metallic labeling. Precautions shall be taken to avoid ignition due to electrostatic
charge on the enclosure.
2. If used with flammable process fluid, or if installed in a Class I Division I area, the electrode circuit must
be installed as intrinsically safe (Ex ia).
3. Conduit entries must be installed to maintain a minimum enclosure ingress rating of IP66.
4. Unused conduit entries must use either used the Rosemount-supplied blanking plugs, or blanking plugs
certified in accordance with the protection type.
207
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
Approvals Document
July 24, 2015
08732-AP01, Rev AF
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
CLASS 2258 02 - PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT - For Hazardous Locations – To Canadian Requirements.
N6
Class I, Groups A, B, C and D (Intrinsically Safe Output and Electrode circuit)
N6
N6
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D (Non-Incendive)
Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F and G (Dust Ignition Proof)
Magnetic Flow Meter – Model 8732EM Transmitter with integral or remote mount to Model 8705M or Model
8711M/L Magnetic Flow Tubes. Enclosure Type 4X and IP 66 Rated.
For Remote Mount Configuration – Temperature Code T4 with an Ambient Operating Temperature Range: -40°C
чꢀdĂꢀчꢀнϲϬΣꢁ͕ꢀǁŝƚŚꢀŽƌꢀǁŝƚŚŽƵƚꢀ>ꢁꢂꢀŵĞƚĞƌ͕ꢀǁŝƚŚꢀŽƌꢀǁŝƚŚŽƵƚꢀĚŝŐŝƚĂůꢀ/ͬKꢀĂŶĚͬŽƌꢀƉƵůƐĞꢀŽƵƚƉƵƚƐꢀǁŚĞŶꢀŝŶƐƚĂůůĞĚꢀƉĞƌꢀ
Rosemount Drawing 08732-2061.
For Integral Mount Configuration – Ambient Operating Temperature Range: -29°C чꢀdĂꢀчꢀнϲϬΣꢁ. Temperature
Code T3-T6 dependent on line size of Flow Tubes for Process Temperature. The T-Code is defined as per
Rosemount Drawing 08705-00CS and 08732-00CS for ‘N6’ option or ‘KU’ option.
CLASS 2258 82 - PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT - For Hazardous Locations –To US Requirements
KU
Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D (Explosion Proof)
N6, KU
Class I, Groups A, B, C and D (Intrinsically Safe Output and Electrode circuit
N6, KU
N6, KU
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D (Non-Incendive)
Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F and G (Dust Ignition Proof)
Magnetic Flow Meter – Model 8732EM Transmitter with integral or remote mount to Model 8705M or Model
8711M/L Magnetic Flow Tubes. Enclosure Type 4X and IP 66 Rated.
For Remote Mount Configuration – Temperature Code T6 for Explosion Proof, T5 for Dust Ignition Proof, and T4
for Non-Incendive. Ambient Operating Temperature Range: -ϰϬΣꢁꢀчꢀdĂꢀчꢀнϲϬΣꢁ͕ꢀǁŝƚŚꢀŽƌꢀǁŝƚŚŽƵƚꢀ>ꢁꢂꢀŵĞƚĞƌ͕ꢀǁŝƚŚꢀ
or without digital I/O and/or pulse outputs when installed per Rosemount Drawing 08732-2061.
For Integral Mount Configuration – Ambient Operating Temperature Range: -ϮϵΣꢁꢀч dĂꢀчꢀнϲϬΣꢁ. Temperature
Code T3-T6 dependent on line size of Flow Tubes for Process Temperature. The T-Code is defined as per
Rosemount Drawing 08705-00CS and 08732-00CS for ‘N6’ option or ‘KU’ option.
Special Conditions of Safe Use:
1. For use with the appropriate 8705M and 8711M/L Flow tubes only.
2. When the 8732EM transmitter is integrally mounted to 8705M or 8711M/L Flow Tubes, the ambient
temperature ranges marked on each product need to be taken into consideration before installation.
The Ambient temperature range for 8732EM transmitter is -ϰϬΣꢁꢀчꢀdĂꢀчꢀнϲϬΣꢁꢀĂŶĚꢀƚŚĞꢀĂŵďŝĞŶƚꢀ
temperature range for 8705M or 8711M/L Flow Tubes is -ϮϵΣꢁꢀчꢀdĂꢀчꢀнϲϬΣꢁꢀ͘ Therefore, the -29°C rating
of the flow tubes will limit the overall cold temperature range of the complete system unless other
approved temperature control methods are employed.
208
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
Rosemount 8700M Magnetic Flowmeter Platform
IEC EX & ATEX Approval Document
January 29, 2015,
08732-AP02, Rev AB
1. Equipment Markings – See section VI in the tables on the following pages
a. EC-Type Examination Certificate (ATEX): DEKRA 14ATEX0071_X
b. Certificate of Conformity (IEC Ex): IEC Ex DEK 14.0031X
2. Required Documentation:
a. 08732-2060 Installation Drawing Model 8732EM, 8705M, 8711-M/L ATEX/IEC Ex Hazardous (Ex)
Locations
b. 08732-1504 Installation Drawing, 8732EM Transmitter Wiring
3. Referenced Documentation:
a. 00825-0100-4444.pdf(Hart) & 00825-0400-4444(Modbus), Quick Installation Guide
b. 00809-0100-4444.pdf, Reference Manual
c. 08732-AP01, Approvals Document
4. The Required and Referenced Documents listed above address the following items:
a. Instructions for safety i.e.
i. Putting into service
ii. Use
iii. Assembling and dismantling
iv. Maintenance, overhaul and repair
v. Installation
vi. Adjustment
b. Where necessary, training instructions
c. Details which allow a decision to be made as to whether the equipment can be used safely in the
intended area under the expected operating conditions
d. Electrical parameters, maximum surface temperatures and other limit values
i. Electrical –
1. See document 08732-2060
2.
Rosemount 8732EM Flow Transmitter
Power input
90 - 250VAC, 0.45A, 40VA
12 - 42VDC, 1.2A, 15W
Pulsed circuit
4-20mA output circuit
MODBUS
Internally powered (Active): Outputs up to 12VDC, 12.1mA,
73mW Externally powered (Passive): Input up to 28VDC,
100mA, 1W
Internally Powered (Active): Outputs up to 25mA, 24VDC,
600mW Externally Powered (Passive): Input up to 25mA,
30VDC, 750mW
Internally Powered (Active): Outputs up to 100mA, 3.3VDC,
100mW
250V
Um
500mA, 40V max, 9W max
Coil excitation output
(1)
Rosemount 8705-M and 8711-M/L Flowtube
500mA, 40V max,
20W max
Coil excitation input
Electrode circuit
5V,200uA, 1mW
(1) Provided by the transmitter
209
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
Rosemount 8700M Magnetic Flowmeter Platform
IEC EX & ATEX Approval Document
January 29, 2015,
08732-AP02, Rev AB
e. Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
i. For processes requiring EPL Ga and Gb, rated equipment: electrode, grounding ring, and lining
protector materials Titanium and Zirconium are not allowed.
ii. When “Special Paint Systems” are applied, instructions for safe use regarding potential
electrostatic charging hazard have to be followed.
iii. Terminals 1,2,3,4, for data communication, cannot withstand the 500 V isolation test between
signal and ground, due to integral transient protection. This must be taken into account upon
installation.
iv. Conduit entries must be installed to maintain the enclosure ingress rating of IP66.
v. In order to maintain the ingress protection level on the M3 and M4 electrode housing, the copper
crush washer that seals the electrode access plug shall be replaced when the plug is reinstalled.
The copper crush washer is one time use only.
vi. The flow tube and transmitter are not allowed to be thermally insulated.
vii. The property class of the special fasteners which attach the Magnetic Flow Tube or Transmitter
Remote Junction Box to the Magnetic Transmitter is A2-70 or A4-70 SST.
viii. For information on the dimensions of the flameproof joints the manufacturer shall be contacted.
ix. The Magnetic Flow Meter Tube contains nonconductive liners over the grounded tube. For
process requiring EPL Ga, precautions shall be taken to avoid the liner being charged by the flow
of nonconductive media.
f. Where necessary, the essential characteristics of tools which may be fitted to the equipment
g. List of the standards, including the issue date, with which the equipment is declared to comply:
i. ATEX - EN 60079-0: 2012 +A11, EN 60079-1: 2007, EN 60079-7: 2007. EN 60079-11: 2012, EN
60079-15: 2010, EN 60079-26: 2007, EN 60079-31: 2014
ii. IEC EX - IEC 60079-0: 2011, IEC 60079-1: 2007, IEC 60079-7: 2006 IEC 60079-11: 2011, IEC
60079-15: 2010, IEC 60079-26: 2006, IEC 60079-31: 2013
h. Supply wire requirements;
Use 10 - 18 AWG wire rated for the proper temperature of the application. For wire 10 - 14 AWG use lugs
or other appropriate connectors. For connections in ambient temperatures above 122°F (50 °C), use a
wire rated for 194 °F (90 °C).
i. Contact address;
i. Rosemount Inc.
12001 Technology Drive
Eden Prairie
MN 55344
United States of America
210
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
Rosemount 8700M Magnetic Flowmeter Platform
IEC EX & ATEX Approval Document
January 29, 2015,
08732-AP02, Rev AB
Nomenclature Magnetic Flow Transmitter Model 8732EM and electrical data
8732EM
I
R
1
B
2
V
K1
VI
…
M4 RT50
VII VIII
…
SH
IX
…
V2
…
F090…
X
II III IV
Desig-
Value Explanation
8732EM Magnetic Flow Transmitter – Field Mount
Explanation
nation
I
Model
R
T
Remote Mount
Integral Mount
II
Transmitter Mount
1
2
AC (90 - 250 Vac, 50 / 60 Hz), not for Ex nA
DC (12 - 42 Vdc)
III
Transmitter Power Supply
A
4 - 20 mA with digital HART Protocol & Scalable
Pulse Output
4 - 20 mA Intrinsically Safe Output with digital HART
Protocol & Intrinsically Safe Scalable Pulse Output
Modbus RS-485
IV
V
Outputs
B
M
1 or 4 ½-14 NPT female
2 or 5 CM20, M20 female
Conduit entries
II 2 (1) G Ex d e [ia Ga] IIC T6…T3 Gb
II 2 D Ex tb IIIC T80 °C…T200 °C Db
II 2 (1) G Ex d [ia Ga] IIC T6…T3 Gb *
II 2 D Ex tb IIIC T80 °C…T200 °C Db
Ex d e [ia Ga] IIC T6…T3 Gb
Ex tb IIIC T80 °C…T200 °C Db
K1 ATEX
K7 IECEx
Ex d [ia Ga] IIC T6…T3 Gb *
Ex tb IIIC T80 °C…T200 °C Db
II 3 (1) G Ex nA [ia Ga] IIC T4…T3 Gc ***
N1 ATEX
N7 IECEx
II 2 D
Ex tb IIIC T80 °C…T200 °C Db
VI
Safety Approval Option
Ex nA [ia Ga] IIC T4…T3 Gc ***
Ex tb IIIC T80 °C…T200 °C Db
II 2 D
II 2 D
II (1) G
Ex tb IIIC T80 °C…T200 °C Db
Ex tb IIIC T80 °C…T200 °C Db
[Ex ia Ga] IIC **
ND ATEX
NF IECEx
Ex tb IIIC T80 °C…T200 °C Db
Ex tb IIIC T80 °C…T200 °C Db
[Ex ia Ga] IIC **
NOTE: *
Integral Mount (see II) option only
** Intrinsically Safe Output (see IV) option only
*** DC Transmitter Power Supply only (12 - 42 Vdc)
M4
M5
LOI
Display
VII
Display Option
RTxx **** Standard Temperature Component
RHxx **** Extended Temperature Component
NOTE: **** Length = xx x 10 ft, max. 500 ft
VIII
Remote Cable Option
--
Aluminum, standard paint
IX
X
Options
Specials
SH
Vx
Stainless Steel Electronics Housing
Special Paint Systems *****
F090x Special Paint Systems *****
NOTE: *****Subject to special conditions for safe use.
211
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
Rosemount 8700M Magnetic Flowmeter Platform
IEC EX & ATEX Approval Document
January 29, 2015,
08732-AP02, Rev AB
Nomenclature Magnetic Flow Tube Model 8705-M and electrical data
8705 … S
A
005 … M4 K1 … G1 L1 B3 … J1 SJ … V1 … SH … F090x
I
II III IV
V
VI
VII VIII IX
X
XI
XII
XIII
XIV
Designation
Explanation
Model
Value
8705
Explanation
Magnetic Flowtube
I
II
III
Electrode Material
Electrode Types
Custom
Custom
See special conditions for safe use
Seal of electrodes comply with IEC 61010-1
005
to
½” NPS (15 mm)
to
IV
V
Line Size
360
36” NPS (900 mm)
M0
M1
M2
M3
M4
Category 2 G or 3 G, EPL Gb or Gc
Category 2 G or 3 G, EPL Gb or Gc
Category 1/2 G or 1/3 G, EPL Ga/Gb or Ga/Gc
Category 1/2 G or 1/3 G, EPL Ga/Gb or Ga/Gc
Category 1/2 G or 1/3 G, EPL Ga/Gb or Ga/Gc
Electrode Housing *
II 1/2 G
II 2 D
II 2 G
II 2 D
Ex e ia IIC T5…T3 Ga/Gb *
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
K1 ATEX
K7 IECEx
N1 ATEX
N7 IECEx
Ex e ib IIC T5…T3 Gb **
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
Ex e ia IIC T5…T3 Ga/Gb *
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
Ex e ib IIC T5…T3 Gb **
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
II 1/3 G
II 2 D
II 3 G
II 2 D
Ex nA ia IIC T5…T3 Ga/Gc * line sizes 8”- 36”
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
VI
Safety Approvals
Ex nA ic IIC T5…T3 Gc * line sizes 0.5” – 6” / **
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
Ex nA ia IIC T5…T3 Ga/Gc * line sizes 8”- 36”
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
Ex nA ic IIC T5…T3 Gc * line sizes 0.5” – 6” / **
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
ND ATEX
NF IECEx
II 2 D
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
NOTE: * Electrode Housing M2, M3 and M4 only
** Electrode Housing M0 and M1 only
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
Grounding rings
material
Lining protector
material
Mounting
Configuration
VII
VIII
IX
Custom
Custom
B3
See special conditions for safe use
See special conditions for safe use
Integral Mount with Model 8732EM
CM20, M20 female
Optional conduit
entries
X
J1
Remote Junction Box
(RJB) material
--
SJ
Aluminum, Standard Paint
316 Stainless Steel
XI
XII
Special paint options
Vx
Special Paint Systems ***
Wrapper (housing)
--
Carbon Steel (w. Aluminum RJB), Standard Paint
XIII
XIV
material
SH
316 Stainless Steel (w. Stainless Steel RJB)
Specials
F090x
Special Paint Systems ***
NOTE: *** Subject to special conditions for safe use.
212
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
Rosemount 8700M Magnetic Flowmeter Platform
IEC EX & ATEX Approval Document
January 29, 2015,
08732-AP02, Rev AB
Nomenclature Magnetic Flow Tube Model 8711-M/L and electrical data
8711
I
…
S
A
15F
L
V
…
K1
VI
…
G1
VII
…
J1 SJ … V1 … F090x
II III IV
VIII IX
X
XI
Designation
Value
8711
Explanation
Magnetic Flow Tube
Explanation
Model
I
II
III
Electrode Material
Electrode Types
Custom See special conditions for safe use
Custom Seal of electrodes comply with IEC 61010-1.
015
to
1½” NPS (40 mm)
to
IV
V
Line Size
080
8” NPS (900 mm)
Mounting
Configuration
L
M
Remote Mount from Transmitter
Integral Mount with Transmitter
K1
ATEX
II 2 G
II 2 D
Ex e ib IIC T5…T3 Gb
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
Ex e ib IIC T5…T3 Gb
K7 IECEx
N1 ATEX
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
II 3 G
II 2 D
Ex nA ic IIC T5…T3 Gc
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
VI
Safety Approvals
Ex nA ic IIC T5…T3 Gc
N7 IECEx
ND ATEX
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
II 2 D
Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
NF IECEx Ex tb IIIC T 80 °C…T 200 °C Db
Grounding rings
material
VII
Custom See special conditions for safe use
Optional conduit
entries
VIII
J1
CM20, M20 female
--
SJ
Aluminum, Standard Paint *
Remote Junction
Box material
316 Stainless Steel *
IX
NOTE:* Flowtube with Carbon Steel Wrapper (housing)
Special paint
options
X
Vx
Special Paint Systems **
XI
Specials
F090x
Special Paint Systems **
NOTE: ** Subject to special conditions for safe use.
213
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
215
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
216
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
217
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
218
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
220
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
221
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
222
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
223
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
224
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
225
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
226
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
227
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
Approvals Document
July 24, 2015
08732-AP01, Rev AF
229
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix B: Product Certifications
August 2015
Approvals Document
July 24, 2015
08732-AP01, Rev AF
230
Product Certifications
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix C: Wiring Diagrams
August 2015
Figure C-2. 8732EM Wiring Diagram—Combination Cable
232
Wiring Diagrams
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix C: Wiring Diagrams
August 2015
Figure C-4. Wiring Diagram—775 Smart Wireless THUM Adapter with 8732EM External Analog Power
234
Wiring Diagrams
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix C: Wiring Diagrams
August 2015
Figure C-6. Wiring Diagram—475 Field Communicator with 8732EM External Analog Power
236
Wiring Diagrams
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
Appendix D
Implementing a Universal
Transmitter
Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 237
Endress and Hauser sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 245
Kent Veriflux VTC sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 256
Krohne sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 258
Taylor sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 259
Yamatake Honeywell sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 261
Generic manufacturer sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 263
D.1
D.2
Safety messages
Instructions and procedures in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Please read the following safety messages before
performing any operation described in this section.
The Rosemount 8732EM Transmitter has not been evaluated for use with other
manufacturers' magnetic flowmeter sensors in hazardous (Ex or Classified) areas.
Special care should be taken by the end-user and installer to ensure the 8732EM
transmitter meets the safety and performance requirements of the other manufacturer’s
equipment.
Universal capability
The 8732EM transmitter has the ability to drive other manufacturers' sensors and report a flow
rate. In addition to providing a flow measurement, all of the diagnostic functionality is also
available in a universal application. This capability can provide additional information into the
installation, process, and meter health, in addition to enabling a common maintenance practice
for all magnetic flowmeter installations and helping to reduce spares inventory of magnetic
flowmeter transmitters.
This section details how to wire the transmitter to other manufacturers' sensors and configure
the universal capabilities.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
237
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
August 2015
D.2.1
Implementation
There are three easy steps when implementing a universal transmitter.
1.
Review the existing application. Verify the existing sensor is in good working order, and
Rosemount universal transmitter is compatible with the existing sensor. Verifying the
sensor is functioning correctly. While the universal transmitter may be able to drive the
existing sensor, if the sensor is not in good working order the universal transmitter may
not function correctly.
2.
3.
Connect the universal transmitter to the existing sensor using the wiring diagrams in
this appendix. If the existing sensor is not listed in this appendix, contact Rosemount
technical support for more details on the application of the universal capabilities.
up parameters as needed. One of the key configuration parameters is the sensor
calibration number. There are several methods to determine the calibration number,
but the most common method will be to use the universal trim capability. This
functionality is detailed in this appendix. Accuracy of the meter when the universal trim
is used to determine the calibration number will be dependent on the accuracy of the
known flow rate used in the trim process.
In addition to the universal trim, there are two other methodologies for determining a
calibration number for the sensor.
Method 1: Have the sensor sent to a Rosemount service center for determination of a
calibration number compatible with the universal transmitter. This is the most accurate method
for determining the calibration number and will provide a 0.5% of rate measurement accuracy
from 3 to 40 fps (1-10 m/s).
Method 2: Involves the conversion of the existing sensor calibration number/meter factors to
an equivalent Rosemount 16-digit calibration number. Accuracy of the meter using this
methodology is estimated to be in the range of 2-3%. Contact the Rosemount technical support
for more information on this method or to determine a calibration number for the existing
sensor.
Once these steps are completed, the meter will begin measuring flow. Verify the measured flow
rate is within the expected range and that the mA output correctly corresponds to the
measured flow rate. Also verify the reading in the control system matches the reading at the
transmitter. Once these items have been verified, the loop can be placed into automatic control
as needed.
Universal trim
LOI menu path
Fast keys
Diagnostics, Trims, Universal Trim
1, 2, 5, 5
The universal auto trim function enables the Rosemount 8732 to determine a calibration
number for sensors that were not calibrated at the Rosemount factory. The function is activated
as one step in a procedure known as in-process calibration. If the sensor has a 16-digit
Rosemount calibration number, in-process calibration is not required.
1.
Determine the flow rate of the process fluid in the sensor.
238
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
Note
The flow rate in the line can be determined by using another sensor in the line, by counting the
revolutions of a centrifugal pump, or by performing a bucket test to determine how fast a given
volume is filled by the process fluid.
2.
3.
Complete the universal auto trim function.
When the routine is completed, the sensor is ready for use.
Wiring the universal transmitter
The wiring diagrams in this section illustrate the proper connections between the transmitter
and most sensors currently on the market. Specific diagrams are included for most models, and
where information for a particular model of a manufacturer is not available, a generic drawing
pertaining to that manufacturer's sensors is provided. If the manufacturer for the existing
sensor is not included, see the drawing for generic connections.
Table D-1. Transmitter and Sensor Reference
Rosemount transmitter
Sensor manufacturer
Page number
Rosemount
Rosemount 8732
Rosemount 8732
Brooks
Rosemount 8705, 8707, 8711
Rosemount 8701
Rosemount 8732
Rosemount 8732
Endress and Hauser
Rosemount 8732
Fischer and Porter
Rosemount 8732
Rosemount 8732
Rosemount 8732
Rosemount 8732
Rosemount 8732
Rosemount 8732
Foxboro
Model 5000
Model 7400
Generic Wiring for Sensor
Model 10D1418
Model 10D1419
Model 10D1430 (Remote)
Model 10D1430
Model 10D1465, 10D1475 (Integral)
Generic Wiring for Sensors
Rosemount 8732
Rosemount 8732
Rosemount 8732
Rosemount 8732
Kent
Series 1800
Series 1800 (Version 2)
Series 2800
Generic Wiring for Sensors
Rosemount 8732
Rosemount 8732
Krohne
Veriflux VTC
Generic Wiring for Sensors
Rosemount 8732
Taylor
Generic Wiring for Sensors
Rosemount 8732
Rosemount 8732
Yamatake Honeywell
Rosemount 8732
Yokogawa
Series 1100
Generic Wiring for Sensors
Generic Wiring for Sensors
Generic Wiring for Sensors
Generic Wiring for Sensors
Rosemount 8732
Generic Manufacturer Wiring
Rosemount 8732
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
239
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
August 2015
D.3
Rosemount sensors
D.3.1
8705/8707/8711/8721 sensors to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Rosemount 8705/8707/8711/8721 Sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter,
Figure D-1. Wiring Diagram to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter
Table D-2. Rosemount 8705/8707/8711/8721 Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732 transmitters Rosemount 8705/8707/8711/8721 sensors
1
2
1
2
3
3
17
18
19
17
18
19
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the
transmitter coil excitation circuit.
240
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
D.3.2
8701 sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Rosemount 8701 Sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
Figure D-2. Wiring Diagram for Rosemount 8701 Sensor and Rosemount 8732 Transmitter
Rosemount 8701 sensor
Rosemount 8732 Transmitter
17 1
1
18 2
2
19
3
17
18
19
terminal block configuration drawing.
Table D-3. Rosemount 8701 Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Rosemount 8701 sensors
1
2
1
2
3
3
17
18
19
17
18
19
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the
transmitter coil excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
241
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
August 2015
D.3.3
Connecting sensors of other manufacturers
Before connecting another manufacturer’s sensor to the transmitter, it is necessary to perform
the following functions.
1.
Turn off the AC power to the sensor and transmitter. Failure to do so could result in
electrical shock or damage to the transmitter.
2.
Verify the coil drive cables between the sensor and the transmitter are not connected
to any other equipment.
3.
4.
5.
Label the coil drive cables and electrode cables for connection to the transmitter.
Disconnect the wires from the existing transmitter.
Remove the existing transmitter. Mount the new transmitter. See “Installation” on
6.
Verify the sensor coil is configured for series connection. Other manufacturers sensors
may be wired in either a series or parallel circuit. All Rosemount magnetic sensors are
wired in a series circuit. (Other manufacturers AC sensors (AC coils) wired for 220VAC
operation are typically wired in parallel and must be rewired in series.)
7.
Verify the sensor is in good working condition. Use the manufacturer’s recommended
test procedure for verification of sensor condition. Perform the basic checks:
a. Check the coils for shorts or open circuits.
b. Check the sensor liner for wear or damage.
c. Check the electrodes for shorts, leaks, or damage.
d. Connect the sensor to the transmitter in accordance with reference wiring
drawings.
e. Connect and verify all connections between the sensor and the transmitter, then
apply power to the transmitter.
f. Perform the Universal Auto Trim function.
Do not connect mains or line
power to the magnetic
flowtube sensor or to the
transmitter coil excitation
circuit.
242
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
D.4
Brooks sensors
D.4.1
Model 5000 sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Model 5000 sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
Figure D-3. Wiring Diagram for Brooks Sensor Model 5000 and Rosemount 8732
Brooks Model 5000
Rosemount 8732 Transmitter
19
18
17
3
2
1
block configuration drawing.
Table D-4. Brooks Model 5000 Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Brooks sensors Model 5000
1
2
1
2
3
3
17
18
19
17
18
19
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the
transmitter coil excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
243
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
August 2015
D.4.2
Model 7400 sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Model 7400 sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
Figure D-4. Wiring Diagram for Brooks Sensor Model 7400 and Rosemount 8732
BROOKS MODEL 7400
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
19
18
17
3
2
1
terminal block configuration drawing.
Table D-5. Brooks Model 7400 sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Brooks Sensors Model 7400
1
2
Coils +
Coils –
3
3
17
18
19
Shield
Electrode +
Electrode –
Do not connect mains or line power to
the magnetic flowtube sensor or to the
transmitter coil excitation circuit.
244
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
D.5
Endress and Hauser sensors
D.5.1
Endress and Hauser sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect an Endress and Hauser sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive
Figure D-5. Wiring Diagram for Endress and Hauser Sensors and Rosemount 8732
ENDRESS AND HAUSER
SENSORS
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
41
1
2
3
Coils
42
17
18
19
4
Electrodes
5
7
block configuration drawing.
Table D-6. Endress and Hauser Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Endress and Hauser sensors
1
2
41
42
14
4
3
17
18
19
5
7
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
245
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
August 2015
D.6
Fischer and Porter sensors
D.6.1
Model 10D1418 sensor to 8732 transmitter
To connect a Model 10D1418 sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
Figure D-6. Wiring Diagram for Fischer and Porter Sensor Model 10D1418 and Rosemount
8732
Electrode Connections
ROSEMOUNT 8732 TRANSMITTER
3
2
19
1
18
17
3
U1
2
1
U2
G
L1
L2
8
6
Coil Connections
7
5
terminal block configuration drawing.
Table D-7. Fischer and Porter Model 10D1418 Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Fischer and Porter Model 10D1418 sensors
1
2
L1
L2
3
Chassis Ground
17
18
19
3
1
2
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
246
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
D.6.2
Model 10D1419 sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Model 10D1419 sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
Figure D-7. Wiring Diagram for Fischer and Porter Sensor Model 10D1419 and Rosemount
8732
Electrode Connections
ROSEMOUNT 8732 TRANSMITTER
3
2
19
1
18
16
17
17
3
18
2
L1
1
L2
terminal block configuration drawing.
Coil Connections
Table D-8. Fischer and Porter Model 10D1419 Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Fischer and Porter Model 10D1419 sensors
1
2
3
L1
L2
3
17
18
19
3
1
2
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
247
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
August 2015
D.6.3
Model 10D1430 sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Model 10D1430 sensor (Remote) to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil
Figure D-8. Wiring Diagram for Fischer and Porter Sensor Model 10D1430 (Remote) and
Rosemount 8732
Electrode Connections
ROSEMOUNT 8732 TRANSMITTER
1
2
19
3
18
17
3
G
2
L1
1
8
terminal block configuration drawing.
Coil Connections
Table D-9. Fischer and Porter Model 10D1430 (Remote) Sensor Wiring Connections
Fischer and Porter Model 10D1430
Rosemount 8732
(Remote) sensors
1
2
L1
8
3
G
3
1
17
18
19
2
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
248
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
D.6.4
Model 10D1430 sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Model 10D1430 sensor (integral) to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil
Figure D-9. Wiring Diagram for Fischer and Porter Sensor Model 10D1430 (Integral) and
Rosemount 8732
Electrode Connections
ROSEMOUNT 8732 TRANSMITTER
1
19
2
1
3
18
2
17
3
7
3
6
7
L2
2
6
8
1
L1
To L2
U2
L2
L1
U1
G
U2
Coil Connections
U1
TB2
block configuration drawing.
TB1
To Calibration Device
(Disconnect)
Table D-10. Fischer and Porter Model 10D1430 (integral) Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Fischer and Porter Model 10D1430 (Integral) sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
L1
L2
G
3
1
2
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
249
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
August 2015
D.6.5
Model 10D1465/10D1475 sensors to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Model 10D1465 or 10D1475 sensor (integral) to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter,
Figure D-10. Wiring Diagram for Fischer and Porter Sensor Model 10D1465 and Model
10D1475 (integral) and Rosemount 8732
Electrode
ROSEMOUNT 8732 TRANSMITTER
Connections
2A
2
1
5
19
18
17
Disconnect
3
2
1
6
16
3
CT
M2
M1
MR
Coil Connections
configuration drawing.
Table D-11. Fischer and Porter Model 10D1465 and 10D1475 Sensor Wiring Connections
Fischer and Porter Model 10D1465 and
Rosemount 8732
10D1475 sensors
1
2
3
M1
MR
3
17
18
19
3
1
2
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the
transmitter coil excitation circuit.
250
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
D.6.6
Fischer and Porter sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Fischer and Porter sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
Figure D-11. Generic Wiring Diagram for Fischer and Porter Sensors and Rosemount 8732
FISCHER AND PORTER
SENSORS
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
Electrodes
19
2
1
18
3
17
Coils
3
Chassis
M2
2
M1
1
block configuration drawing.
Table D-12. Fischer and Porter Generic Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Fischer and Porter sensors
1
2
M1
M2
3
Chassis Ground
17
18
19
3
1
2
Do not connect mains or line power
to the magnetic flowtube sensor or
to the transmitter coil excitation
circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
251
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
August 2015
D.7
Foxboro sensors
D.7.1
Series 1800 sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Series 1800 sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
Figure D-12. Wiring Diagram for Foxboro Series 1800 and Rosemount 8732
FOXBORO SERIES 1800
SENSOR
Electrode Connections
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
White Lead
White Shield
Outer Shield
19
18
17
3
2
1
Black Lead
Black Shield
Inner Shield
terminal block configuration drawing.
Coil Connections
Table D-13. Foxboro Series1800 Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Foxboro Series 1800 sensors
1
2
L1
L2
3
Chassis Ground
Any Shield
Black
17
18
19
White
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
252
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
D.7.2
Series 1800 sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Series 1800 (version 2) sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive
Figure D-13. Wiring Diagram for Foxboro Series 1800 (Version 2) and Rosemount 8732
FOXBORO SERIES
1800 SENSOR
ROSEMOUNT
(VERSION 2)
8732
TRANSMITTER
19
White
Black
18
17
Shield
3
2
1
Electrode
Connections
L1
GND
L2
actual terminal block configuration
drawing.
Coil Connections
Table D-14. Foxboro Series 1800 (Version 2) Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Foxboro Series 1800 sensors
1
2
L1
L2
3
Chassis Ground
Any Shield
Black
17
18
19
White
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
253
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
August 2015
D.7.3
Series 2800 Sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Series 2800 Sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
Figure D-14. Wiring Diagram for Foxboro Series 2800 and Rosemount 8732
FOXBORO SERIES 2800
SENSOR
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
Electrode Connections
Outer Shield
White Lead
White Shield
White
Black
19
18
17
3
Any Shield
Black Lead
Black Shield
Inner Shield
2
1
L2
L1
G
Coil Connections
actual terminal block configuration
drawing.
Table D-15. Foxboro Series 2800 Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Foxboro Series 2800 Sensors
1
2
L1
L2
3
Chassis Ground
Any Shield
Black
17
18
19
White
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
254
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
D.7.4
Foxboro Sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Foxboro Sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and electrode
Figure D-15. Generic Wiring Diagram for Foxboro Sensors and Rosemount 8732
ROSEMOUNT 8732
FOXBORO SENSOR
TRANSMITTER
19
White
Black
Electrodes
18
Any Shield
17
3
Ground
Coils
2
L2
1
L1
terminal block configuration drawing.
Table D-16. Foxboro Generic Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Foxboro sensors
1
2
L1
L2
3
Chassis Ground
Any Shield
Black
17
18
19
White
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
255
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
August 2015
D.8
Kent Veriflux VTC sensor
D.8.1
Veriflux VTC sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Veriflux VTC sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
Figure D-16. Wiring Diagram for Kent Veriflux VTC Sensor and Rosemount 8732
KENT VERIFLUX VTC
SENSOR
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
Electrode Connections
19
18
17
3
2
1
actual terminal block configuration
drawing.
Coil Connections
Table D-17. Kent Veriflux VTC Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Kent Veriflux VTC sensors
1
2
2
1
3
SCR OUT
SCR OUT
SIG1
17
18
19
SIG2
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
256
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
D.9
Kent sensors
D.9.1
Kent sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Kent sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and electrode
Figure D-17. Generic Wiring Diagram for Kent Sensors and Rosemount 8732
KENT SENSORS
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
19
18
17
SIG2
Electrodes
SIG1
SCR OUT
3
2
1
SCR OUT
2
Coils
1
actual terminal block configuration
drawing.
Table D-18. Kent Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Kent sensors
1
2
1
2
3
SCR OUT
SCR OUT
SIG1
17
18
19
SIG2
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
257
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
August 2015
D.10
Krohne sensors
D.10.1
Krohne sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Krohne sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and electrode
Figure D-18. Generic Wiring Diagram for Krohne Sensors and Rosemount 8732
KROHNE SENSORS
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
3
2
19
18
17
Electrodes
Electrode Shield
3
2
1
Coil Shield
7
Coils
8
actual terminal block configuration
drawing.
Table D-19. Krohne Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Krohne sensors
1
2
8
7
3
Coil Shield
17
18
19
Electrode Shield
2
3
Do not connect mains or line power to the magnetic
flowtube sensor or to the transmitter coil excitation
circuit.
258
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
D.11
Taylor sensors
D.11.1
Series 1100 sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Series 1100 sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
Figure D-19. Wiring Diagram for Taylor Series 1100 Sensors and Rosemount 8732
TAYLOR SERIES 1100 SENSOR
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
Electrode Connections
19
C
L
A
18
17
3
2
1
L N G 1 2 3 4
White
Black
Green
Coil Connections
terminal block configuration drawing.
Table D-20. Taylor Series 1100 Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Taylor Series 1100 sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
Black
White
Green
S1 and S2
E1
E2
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
259
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
August 2015
D.11.2
Taylor sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Taylor sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and electrode
Figure D-20. Generic Wiring Diagram for Taylor Sensors and Rosemount 8732
TAYLOR SENSORS
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
E2
19
18
17
E1
Electrodes
S1 and S2
3
2
1
Green
White
Coils
Black
terminal block configuration drawing.
Table D-21. Taylor Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Taylor sensors
1
2
3
17
18
19
Black
White
Green
S1 and S2
E1
E2
Do not connect mains or line power to the magnetic
flowtube sensor or to the transmitter coil excitation
circuit.
260
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
D.12
Yamatake Honeywell sensors
D.12.1
Yamatake Honeywell sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Yamatake Honeywell sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive
Figure D-21. Generic Wiring Diagram for Yamatake Honeywell Sensors and Rosemount
8732
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
YAMATAKE
HONEYWELL
SENSORS
19
A
Electrodes
B
C
18
17
3
2
1
Chassis Ground
Y
Coils
X
block configuration drawing.
Table D-22. Yamatake Honeywell Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Yamatake Honeywell sensors
1
2
X
Y
3
Chassis Ground
17
18
19
C
B
A
Do not connect mains or line power to the
magnetic flowtube sensor or to the transmitter
coil excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
261
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
August 2015
D.13
Yokogawa sensors
D.13.1
Yokogawa sensor to 8732 Transmitter
To connect a Yokogawa sensor to a Rosemount 8732 Transmitter, connect coil drive and
Figure D-22. Generic Wiring Diagram for Yokogawa Sensors and Rosemount 8732
ROSEMOUNT 8732
TRANSMITTER
YOKOGAWA
SENSORS
A
19
Electrodes
B
C
18
17
3
2
1
Chassis Ground
Ex 2
Coils
Ex 1
actual terminal block configuration
drawing.
Table D-23. Yokogawa Sensor Wiring Connections
Rosemount 8732
Yokogawa sensors
1
2
EX1
EX2
3
Chassis Ground
17
18
19
C
B
A
Do not connect mains or line
power to the magnetic flowtube
sensor or to the transmitter coil
excitation circuit.
262
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
D.14
Generic manufacturer sensor to 8732 Transmitter
D.14.1
Identify the terminals
First check the sensor manufacturer’s manual to identify the appropriate terminals. Otherwise,
perform the following procedure.
Identify coil and electrode terminals
1.
2.
Select a terminal and touch an ohmmeter probe to it.
Touch the second probe to each of the other terminals and record the results for each
terminal.
3.
Repeat the process and record the results for every terminal.
Coil terminals will have a resistance of approximately 3-300 ohms.
Electrode terminals will have an open circuit.
Identify a chassis ground
1.
2.
Touch one probe of an ohmmeter to the sensor chassis.
Touch the other probe to the each sensor terminal and the record the results for each
terminal.
The chassis ground will have a resistance value of one ohm or less.
D.14.2
Wiring connections
Connect the electrode terminals to Rosemount 8732 terminals 18 and 19. The electrode shield
should be connected to terminal 17.
Connect the coil terminals to Rosemount 8732 terminals 1, 2, and 3.
If the Rosemount 8732 Transmitter indicates a reverse flow condition, switch the coil wires
connected to terminals 1 and 2.
Do not connect mains or line
power to the magnetic flowtube
sensor or to the transmitter coil
excitation circuit.
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
263
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Appendix D: Implementing a Universal Transmitter
August 2015
264
Implementing a Universal Transmitter
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Index
August 2015
Index
A
G
Analog Output
Grounding
I
B
Installation
Bolts
Wafer Flowtube
C
Conductivity
L
Lining Protectors
Local Operator Interface (LOI)
D
M
Device Software Functions
Messages
F
Flow Rate
O
Orientation
Flowtube
Flowtubes
P
Pressure
265
Index
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
Index
August 2015
S
W
Specifications
Weight
Wiring Diagrams
Model 8705 and Model 8707
Model 8711
Specifications and Reference Data
Functional Specifications
T
Temperature
U
266
Operation and Maintenance
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4444, Rev AD
August 2015
Global Headquarters
Emerson Process Management
6021 Innovation Blvd.
Shakopee, MN 55379, USA
+1 800 522 6277 or +1 303 527 5200
+1 303 530 8459
North America Regional Office
Emerson Process Management
7070 Winchester Circle
Boulder, CO 80301 USA
+1 800 522 6277 or +1 303 527 5200
+1 303 530 8459
Latin America Regional Office
Emerson Process Management
Multipark Office Center
Turrubares Building, 3rd & 4th floor
Guachipelin de Escazu, Costa Rica
+1 506 2505-6962
+1 954 846 5121
Europe Regional Office
Emerson Process Management Flow B.V.
Neonstraat 1
6718 WX Ede
The Netherlands
+31 (0) 318 495555
+31 (0) 318 495556
Asia Pacific Regional Office
Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific Pte Ltd
1 Pandan Crescent
Singapore 128461
+65 6777 8211
+65 6777 0947
Middle East and Africa Regional Office
Emerson Process Management
Emerson FZE P.O. Box 17033,
Jebel Ali Free Zone - South 2
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
+971 4 8118100
Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale can be found at:
www.rosemount.com\terms_of_sale.
The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co.
Rosemount and Rosemount logotype are registered trademarks of Rosemount Inc.
All other marks are the property of their respective owners.
© 2015 Rosemount Inc. All rights reserved.
+971 4 8865465
|